Upload
1985osvaldo
View
178
Download
2
Tags:
Embed Size (px)
DESCRIPTION
Manual da TelRad sobre antenas de telecomunicações
Citation preview
User Manual
AlvariSTAR
Infrastructure Software Version: 6.0December 2012P/N 216044
Document History
Document History
Topic Description Date Issued
Version 6.0 with the new GUI is regarded as the first publication. December 2012
iiAlvariSTAR User Manual
Legal Rights
Legal Rights© Copyright 2013 Alvarion Ltd. All rights reserved.
The material contained herein is proprietary, privileged, and confidential and owned by Alvarion or its third party licensors. No disclosure thereof shall be made to third parties without the express written permission of Alvarion Ltd.
Alvarion Ltd. reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice. No part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty.
Trade Names
Alvarion®, BreezeCOM®, WALKair®, WALKnet®, BreezeNET®, BreezeACCESS®, BreezeMAX®,
BreezeLITE®, 4Motion® and/or other products and/or services referenced here in are either registered trademarks, trademarks or service marks of Alvarion Ltd.
All other names are or may be the trademarks of their respective owners.
“WiMAX Forum” is a registered trademark of the WiMAX Forum. “WiMAX”, the WiMAX Forum logo, “WiMAX Forum Certified”, and the WiMAX Forum Certified logo are trademarks of the WiMAX Forum.
Statement of Conditions
The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Alvarion Ltd. shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual or equipment supplied with it.
Warranties and Disclaimers
All Alvarion Ltd. (“Alvarion”) products purchased from Alvarion or through any of Alvarion's authorized resellers are subject to the following warranty and product liability terms and conditions.
Exclusive Warranty
(a) Alvarion warrants that the Product hardware it supplies and the tangible media on which any software is installed, under normal use and conditions, will be free from significant defects in materials and workmanship for a period of fourteen (14) months from the date of shipment of a given Product to Purchaser (the “Warranty Period”). Alvarion will, at its sole option and as Purchaser's sole remedy, repair or replace any defective Product in accordance with Alvarion' standard R&R procedure.
(b) With respect to the Firmware, Alvarion warrants the correct functionality according to the attached documentation, for a period of fourteen (14) month from invoice date (the “Warranty Period”). During the Warranty Period, Alvarion may release to its Customers firmware updates, which include additional performance improvements and/or bug fixes, upon availability (the “Warranty”). Bug fixes, temporary patches and/or workarounds may be supplied as Firmware updates.
Additional hardware, if required, to install or use Firmware updates must be purchased by the Customer. Alvarion will be obligated to support solely the two (2) most recent Software major releases.
ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER THIS WARRANTY IF ITS TESTING AND EXAMINATION DISCLOSE THAT THE ALLEGED DEFECT IN THE PRODUCT DOES NOT EXIST OR WAS CAUSED BY PURCHASER'S OR ANY THIRD PERSON'S MISUSE, NEGLIGENCE, IMPROPER INSTALLATION OR IMPROPER TESTING, UNAUTHORIZED ATTEMPTS TO REPAIR, OR ANY OTHER CAUSE BEYOND THE RANGE OF THE INTENDED USE, OR BY ACCIDENT, FIRE, LIGHTNING OR OTHER HAZARD.
Disclaimer
iiiAlvariSTAR User Manual
Legal Rights
(a) The Software is sold on an “AS IS” basis. Alvarion, its affiliates or its licensors MAKE NO WARRANTIES, WHATSOEVER, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND THE ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION. ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE. UNITS OF PRODUCT (INCLUDING ALL THE SOFTWARE) DELIVERED TO PURCHASER HEREUNDER ARE NOT FAULT-TOLERANT AND ARE NOT DESIGNED, MANUFACTURED OR INTENDED FOR USE OR RESALE IN APPLICATIONS WHERE THE FAILURE, MALFUNCTION OR INACCURACY OF PRODUCTS CARRIES A RISK OF DEATH OR BODILY INJURY OR SEVERE PHYSICAL OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE (“HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES”). HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES MAY INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO, USE AS PART OF ON-LINE CONTROL SYSTEMS IN HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTS REQUIRING FAIL-SAFE PERFORMANCE, SUCH AS IN THE OPERATION OF NUCLEAR FACILITIES, AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION OR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS, AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL, LIFE SUPPORT MACHINES, WEAPONS SYSTEMS OR OTHER APPLICATIONS REPRESENTING A SIMILAR DEGREE OF POTENTIAL HAZARD. ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES.
(b) PURCHASER'S SOLE REMEDY FOR BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTIES ABOVE SHALL BE REPLACEMENT OR REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE AS SPECIFIED ABOVE, AT ALVARION'S OPTION. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EITHER IN FACT OR BY OPERATION OF LAW, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES, TERMS OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, CORRESPONDENCE WITH DESCRIPTION, NON-INFRINGEMENT, AND ACCURACY OF INFORMATION GENERATED. ALL OF WHICH ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. ALVARION' WARRANTIES HEREIN RUN ONLY TO PURCHASER, AND ARE NOT EXTENDED TO ANY THIRD PARTIES. ALVARION NEITHER ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER PERSON TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE, INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE OR USE OF ITS PRODUCTS.
Limitation of Liability
(a) ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO THE PURCHASER OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY, FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF USE, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS OR FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, WHETHER ARISING UNDER BREACH OF CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE AND WHETHER BASED ON THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
(b) TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES HEREUNDER OF ALVARION OR ITS EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THE PRODUCT BY PURCHASER, NOR SHALL THE AGGREGATE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES TO ALL PARTIES REGARDING ANY PRODUCT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THAT PRODUCT BY THAT PARTY (EXCEPT IN THE CASE OF A BREACH OF A PARTY'S CONFIDENTIALITY OBLIGATIONS).
ivAlvariSTAR User Manual
Important Notice
Important NoticeThis user manual is delivered subject to the following conditions and restrictions:
This manual contains proprietary information belonging to Alvarion Ltd. Such information is supplied
solely for the purpose of assisting properly authorized users of the respective Alvarion products.
No part of its contents may be used for any other purpose, disclosed to any person or firm or
reproduced by any means, electronic and mechanical, without the express prior written permission of
Alvarion Ltd.
The text and graphics are for the purpose of illustration and reference only. The specifications on
which they are based are subject to change without notice.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license. The software may be used or
copied only in accordance with the terms of that license.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. Corporate and individual names
and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted.
Alvarion Ltd. reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this
publication without prior notice. No part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any
contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty.
The information contained herein is merely descriptive in nature, and does not constitute an offer for
the sale of the product described herein.
Any changes or modifications of equipment, including opening of the equipment not expressly
approved by Alvarion Ltd. will void equipment warranty and any repair thereafter shall be charged for.
It could also void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
vAlvariSTAR User Manual
About This Manual
About This Manual
This manual describes the AlvariSTAR management system (referred to as Network Management System) and the AlvariCRAFT Local CRAFT Utility. The manual describes the full functionality of the Carrier-class management system. Unless otherwise stated, the descriptions apply to both applications.
Limitations on AlvariCRAFT due to the single device restriction are noted in a Note specific to the application, as follows:
This User Manual comprises the following chapters:
Chapter 1- “Introduction”: Provides an overview of the management system and its functionality.
Chapter 2 - “The Equipment Manager”: Describes the Equipment manager and how to use it for
viewing equipment details in either grid or map view and initiating various actions that enable
comprehensive management of equipment in the network.
Chapter 3 - “The Active Events Manager”: Provides details of currently active events (open alarms)
received by the management system from managed devices, enabling management and diagnosis of
these events.
Chapter 4 - “Configuration Operations”:
» “The Offline Project Configuration Manager”: In the current release applicable only for
COMPACT. Describes how to manage Offline Projects and nictitate a Mass Configuration Wizard
for generating Project-based Offline Configuration files.
» “The Offline Building Blocks Manager”: In the current release applicable only for COMPACT.
Describes how to manage Offline Building Blocks for Offline Projects.
» “The Configuration Templates Manager”: Describes how to manage equipment configuration
templates that can be used for modifying configuration of selected devices using the
template-based Multiple Configuration task.
» “The GPS Chains Manager”: In the current release applicable only for Extreme. Describes how to
manage GPS chains.
This feature is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility.
viAlvariSTAR User Manual
About This Manual
» “The Locations Manager”: Describe how to manage locations that can be assigned to specific
devices for improved equipment management functionality. Location may also be assigned to
users to enable domain-based management capabilities.
Chapter 5 - “Events”:
» “Event History Manager”: Describes how to use the Event History manager that provides details
of all events that occurred in the system and easy management access to relevant devices.
» “NBI Events Forwarding Manager”: Describes how to manage North Bound Interfaces for
forwarding events to other management systems.
» “NBI Policy Manager”: Describes how to manage policies for NBI Event Forwarding.
» “Event Templates Manager”: Describes how to manage event templates that define how the
system processes different events.
» “Script Commands Manager”: Describes how to manage script commands triggered by relevant
template-matched events.
Chapter 6- “MS Services”:
» “MS Manager”: Defines how to manage the MSs in the network and open other relevant
management applications.
» “The MS Connection Maintenance Manager”: In the current release applicable only for certain
4Motion devices. Describes how to retrieve data for a single MS or for all MSs served by a specific
ASN-GW and how to force de-registration of one or multiple MSs.
Chapter 7 - “Management”:
» “Discovery Manager”: Describes how to manage definitions for mass discovery of managed
devices.
» “Data Files Manager”: Describes how to manage configuration and performance files stored in
the database and how to initiate different actions that use these files.
» “The Contacts Manager”: Describe how to manage contacts for managed network elements.
» “The Tasks Manager”: Describes how to manage system-wide operations and product line
dependent tasks.
» “Preferences Manager”: Describes how to set values for certain global parameters, define
parameters for connecting to other management applications, define charts/graphs to be
viiAlvariSTAR User Manual
About This Manual
displayed in the Home page, and initiate certain import/export actions of files with location details
of MSs or GPS coordinates information.
Chapter 8 - “Administration”:
» “Users Manager”: Describes how to manage users and associated details such as passwords,
profile membership and contact information.
» “User Profiles Manager”: Describes how to manage user profiles and functional permissions
assigned to them.
» “User Sessions Manager”: Describes the information available for currently logged in users and
how to send messages to logged in users or terminate sessions.
» “The Audit Logs Manager”: Describes the available information in records of events related to the
management system’s database and how to export the logged data to an external Comma
Separated Value (CSV) file.
» “Licenses Manager”: Describes the information available for existing licenses, how to add new
licenses and how to activate a new license.
» “Password Policy Manager”: Describes how to set general policies for user passwords.
» “User Domain Manager”: Describes how to manage optional domains to users, thus limiting the
network visibility of certain users.
» “External Entities Mapping Manager”: Applicable only if LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access
Protocol) connection is enabled. Describes how to map existing LDAP entities to specific user
profiles (if an external LDAP server is to be used for user account management).
Chapter 9 - “StarSuite”:
» “Reports Manager”: Describes how to generate various inventory and configuration reports.
» “Charts Manager”: Describes the various available graphs and charts that provide summary
status information for all managed devices.
Appendix A - “Watchdog”: Describes the Watchdog application used for monitoring the NMS,
database and LDAP servers.
Appendix B - “Connecting to an External LDAP Server”: Describe how to connect AlvariSTAR to an
external LDAP server.
viiAlvariSTAR User Manual
Contents
A
Contents
Chapter 1 - Introduction........................................................................................ 1
1.1 Starting the Client................................................................................................2
1.2 Logging In ............................................................................................................2
1.3 Logging Out or Client Shutdown ...........................................................................3
1.4 Post Installation Checklist ....................................................................................3
1.5 The NMS Client Screen .........................................................................................5
1.6 The Home Page ..................................................................................................17
1.7 Using the Grid View ............................................................................................18
1.8 The About Window.............................................................................................21
1.9 Changing the Password ......................................................................................22
1.10 Common Control Buttons/Icons.........................................................................23
1.11 Single Device Configuration (Device Manager) ...................................................23
Chapter 2 - The Equipment Manager .................................................................... 27
2.1 Introduction to the Equipment Manager .............................................................28
2.2 Switching between Grid and Map Views ..............................................................29
2.3 Equipment List Grid View....................................................................................29
2.4 Map View ...........................................................................................................31
2.5 Equipment Details ..............................................................................................36
2.6 Equipment Actions Panel ....................................................................................43
2.7 Find Equipment Panel .........................................................................................46
2.8 Network Element Discovery................................................................................47
2.9 The Network Element Editor...............................................................................50
2.10 The Common attributes Editor ..........................................................................54
lvariSTAR User Manual ix
Contents
A
2.11 Real-Time Performance Viewer..........................................................................55
2.12 Configuration History Request and Report ........................................................59
2.13 The Equipment Selector Window .......................................................................61
Chapter 3 - The Active Events Manager ................................................................ 62
3.1 Introduction to the Active Events Manager .........................................................63
3.2 Active Events Main Area .....................................................................................63
3.3 Event Details......................................................................................................68
3.4 Active Events Actions Panel................................................................................72
3.5 Find Events Panel ...............................................................................................73
Chapter 4 - Configuration Operations .................................................................. 76
4.1 The Offline Project Configuration Manager .........................................................77
4.2 The Offline Building Blocks Manager ...................................................................82
4.3 The Configuration Templates Manager................................................................84
4.4 The GPS Chains Manager ....................................................................................89
4.5 The Locations Manager.......................................................................................95
Chapter 5 - Events..............................................................................................104
5.1 Event History Manager .....................................................................................105
5.2 NBI Events Forwarding Manager........................................................................116
5.3 NBI Policy Manager...........................................................................................121
5.4 Event Templates Manager.................................................................................128
5.5 Script Commands Manager ...............................................................................141
Chapter 6 - MS Services......................................................................................145
6.1 MS Manager .....................................................................................................146
6.2 The MS Connection Maintenance Manager ........................................................156
Chapter 7 - Management ....................................................................................165
7.1 Discovery Manager ...........................................................................................166
7.2 Data Files Manager...........................................................................................174
lvariSTAR User Manual x
Contents
A
7.3 The Contacts Manager......................................................................................188
7.4 The Tasks Manager...........................................................................................194
7.5 Preferences Manager........................................................................................231
Chapter 8 - Administration .................................................................................252
8.1 Users Manager .................................................................................................253
8.2 User Profiles Manager ......................................................................................269
8.3 User Sessions Manager.....................................................................................279
8.4 The Audit Logs Manager ...................................................................................282
8.5 Licenses Manager.............................................................................................285
8.6 Password Policy Manager..................................................................................290
8.7 User Domain Manager ......................................................................................293
8.8 External Entities Mapping Manager ...................................................................295
Chapter 9 - StarSuite..........................................................................................298
9.1 Reports Manager..............................................................................................299
9.2 Charts Manager ................................................................................................308
Appendix A - Watchdog .....................................................................................320
A.1 The Watchdog Application ................................................................................322
Appendix B - Connecting to an External LDAP Server ..........................................324
B.1 The LDAP Server Configuration File...................................................................326
B.2 Open LDAP Configuration .................................................................................327
B.3 Active Directory Configuration..........................................................................328
lvariSTAR User Manual xi
Chapter 1 - Introduction
In This Chapter:
“Starting the Client” on page 2
“Logging In” on page 2
“Logging Out or Client Shutdown” on page 3
“Post Installation Checklist” on page 3
“The NMS Client Screen” on page 5
“The Home Page” on page 17
“Using the Grid View” on page 18
“The About Window” on page 21
“Changing the Password” on page 22
“Common Control Buttons/Icons” on page 23
“Single Device Configuration (Device Manager)” on page 23
Chapter 1 - IntroductionStarting the ClientChapter 1 - Introduction Starting the Client
1.1 Starting the Client
To start the client, open a web browser and connect to the following URL:
http://<NMS_server_IP_address>:8080/webstart.
The currently supported web browsers are:
Microsoft Internet Explorer (IE) release 8 and higher
Mozila Firefox release 15.0 and higher
Google Chrome release 22.0 and higher.
The Client applet will be loaded to the client station. After the client application is started, the Login
prompt window will be displayed.
1.2 Logging In
To log in, type a valid user name and password at the login prompt. The client application will open,
displaying the Home page.
The default users and passwords are as follows:
INFORMATION
For the Local CRAFT Utility connect to http://localhost:8080/webstart.
Figure 1-1: Login Prompt
Default User Name Default Passwords
admin admin
manager manager
AlvariSTAR User Manual 2
Chapter 1 - IntroductionLogging Out or Client ShutdownChapter 1 - Introduction Logging Out or Client Shutdown
The number of unsuccessful attempts to enter the correct password before the system blocks the login is
limited. The default number of permitted attempts is 3. An account may also be suspended by the
system administrator. For details on re-activating suspended accounts refer to the Reset Password action
in “Users Actions Panel” on page 256.
After first login a Change Password window is opened, forcing a change of password.
1.3 Logging Out or Client Shutdown
Logging out (by clicking on the Logout ( ) icon on the upper right corner of the application screen)
keeps the application running but disable access to the client, preventing unauthorized persons from
using it. The Login prompt is displayed enabling to log in again without the need to restart the client
application.
The Exit feature (using the X icon displayed on the upper right corner of the browser window, or use the
Alt+F4 shortcut) shuts down the client application. To re-run the client application you should reload the
client applet (see Starting the Client above).
After an inactivity time-out of 5 minutes automatic logout will be performing. A warning message
indicating the time before logout will be displayed starting 15 seconds before the automatic logout
action.
1.4 Post Installation Checklist
This section includes:
Licenses
Devices Configuration
SW Upgrade Files
Initial Configuration
Enabling discovery of equipment that should be managed
1.4.1 Licenses
The default demo license is valid for 90 days and includes licenses for two management system clients
and a certain amount of managed devices. It does not support licensed features.
To obtain a permanent license according to your needs, contact your product reseller. New licenses
should be saved in the \<Management_System>\filesystem\license folder of the NMS server. For details
on loading and activating licenses, refer to “Licenses Manager” on page 285.
observer observer
Default User Name Default Passwords
AlvariSTAR User Manual 3
Chapter 1 - IntroductionPost Installation ChecklistChapter 1 - Introduction Post Installation Checklist
1.4.2 Devices Configuration
To discover and properly manage devices, certain parameters must first be properly configured in the
managed devices. For details refer to the Discovery section in the relevant Device Driver Manual.
1.4.3 SW Upgrade Files
Software Upgrade files for the managed devices need to be stored on the NMS Server in the
management system firmware repository folder located under \<Management_System>\file
system\firmware\<product-line>. The product line name is device dependant:
COMPACT: ngp
4Motion: wm
Extreme: pico
1.4.4 Initial Configuration
After completing the installation of a new management system, the system administrator should login
as admin user (see Logging In above) and perform the following tasks:
1 Design the equipment location hierarchy. Define locations and sub-locations (refer to “The Locations
Manager” on page 95). You may also define contacts to be associated later with specific equipment
(see “The Contacts Manager” on page 188).
2 Define general password policy (refer to “Password Policy Manager” on page 290).
3 If needed, define new user profiles (refer to “User Profiles Manager” on page 269), users (refer to
“Users Manager” on page 253), and users’ domains (refer to “User Domain Manager” on page 293).
4 In the Discovery tab (refer to “Discovery Manager” on page 166) define all necessary parameters for
discovering devices that should be managed by the system and initiate the Network Scan task (refer
to “Network Scan Task” on page 210) for discovering these devices.
1.4.5 Enabling discovery of equipment that should be managed
To enable discovery by the management system and support remote management of the equipment
some basic parameters must be configured locally using either Telnet or the Local CRAFT Utility.
Refer to the Commissioning section in the relevant System Manuals for details on the minimal
configuration required for enabling discovery and remote management of the equipment.
INFORMATIONThe firmware repository folder is created automatically for certain device drivers. For other device drivers it should be created manually.
Use forward slashes in UNIX systems.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 4
Chapter 1 - IntroductionThe NMS Client ScreenChapter 1 - Introduction The NMS Client Screen
Note that if the management system is behind a NAT router, the NAT Outside IP address (the IP of the
router’s interface connected in the direction of the managed device LAN) must be defined in the device
as a Trap Manager, with traps sending enabled. In the NAT router, Port Forwarding (NAT Traversal) must
be configured for UDP and TCP ports 161 and 162 from Outside IP (connected to the managed device’s
LAN) to Inside IP (connected to the management system’s LAN).
1.5 The NMS Client Screen
After logging in, the NMS Client Screen is displayed, providing access to all functions. By default it is
opened displaying the Home tab with immediate access to two other fixed tabs: Equipment and Active
Events.
The typical NMS Client screen includes some or all of the following sections:
Tabs Ribbon
Main Menu
Status & Info
Main Area
Details Panel
Find Panel
Actions Panel
Management Systems Icons
AlvariSTAR User Manual 5
Chapter 1 - IntroductionThe NMS Client ScreenChapter 1 - Introduction The NMS Client Screen
1.5.1 Tabs Ribbon
Most of the management functions are organized as tabs. A new function tab is typically opened by
selecting the relevant option in the Main Menu (see below). The Tabs Ribbon displays all the currently
open management functions. The currently active tab is highlighted blue, all other open tabs are grey.
The following tabs Home, Equipment and Active Events tabs are always available and cannot be closed:
Home: Provides a high-level graphical view of the entire system (see “The Home Page” on page 17).
Equipment: Provides a view of all devices that can be managed by the specific user, with some general
information on managed devices and access to various functions that enable comprehensive
management of equipment in the network (see “The Equipment Manager” on page 27).
Active Events: Provides details of currently active events (open alarms) received by the management
system from devices that can be managed by the specific user, enabling management and diagnosis of
these events (see “The Active Events Manager” on page 62).
All other tabs can be closed by clicking on the X sign located in the top right corner of the tab.
If the number of open tabs is larger than required for proper presentation of tab textual headers
(depends on actual screen width), excessive tabs headers are hidden. Left / right arrows are presented at
the right end of the tabs ribbon, indicating the presence of additional open tab headers in the specific
direction(s), and enabling left / right scrolling.
Figure 1-2: The NMS Client Screen (Equipment Tab)
AlvariSTAR User Manual 6
Chapter 1 - IntroductionThe NMS Client ScreenChapter 1 - Introduction The NMS Client Screen
1.5.2 Main Menu
The main menu contains all menus and their options, providing access to the main management
functions.
To open a menu, click on the menu name or on the down-arrow located on the right side of the menu
item. The available options will be displayed.
To hide the menu options click again on the menu name or on the up-arrow located on the right side of
the menu item. You can also click anywhere in the screen area to hide the currently open menu options.
Click on an option to open the applicable tab (or window) and hide the menu options. If the relevant tab
is already open, it will become the active tab.
The complete list of management functions available through the menu bar are described below. Note
that the actually available menus/options depend on the installed device driver(s) and the functional
permissions assigned to the logged in user (see “User Profiles Manager” on page 269) and on the
installed device drivers.
Menu Option
Configuration Operations
Offline Project Configuration: In the current release applicable only for COMPACT. Enables managing Offline Projects, creating new Projects and initiating a Mass Configuration Wizard for generating Project-based Offline Configuration files. Refer to “The Offline Project Configuration Manager” on page 77.
Offline Building Blocks: In the current release applicable only for COMPACT. Enables managing Offline Building Blocks for Offline Projects. Refer to “The Offline Building Blocks Manager” on page 82.
Configuration Templates: Enables managing equipment configuration templates that can be used for modifying configuration of selected devices using the template-based Multiple Configuration task. Refer to “The Configuration Templates Manager” on page 84.
GPS Chains: In the current release applicable only for Extreme. Not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility. Enables managing GPS chains. Refer to “The GPS Chains Manager” on page 89.
Locations: Enables managing equipment locations. Refer to “The Locations Manager” on page 95.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 7
Chapter 1 - IntroductionThe NMS Client ScreenChapter 1 - Introduction The NMS Client Screen
Events Event History: Displays a list of all events and alarms that occurred in the system, providing easy management access to relevant devices. Refer to “Event History Manager” on page 105.
NBI Events Forwarding: Not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility Enables management of North Bound Interfaces to other management systems. Refer to “NBI Events Forwarding Manager” on page 116.
NBI Policy: Not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility Enables management of policies to be used by NBI Events Forwarding interfaces. Refer to “NBI Policy Manager” on page 121.
Event Templates: Enables managing event templates that define how the system processes different events, including execution of of script commands. Refer to “Event Templates Manager” on page 128.
Script Commands: Enables managing script commands triggered by relevant template-matched events. Refer to “Script Commands Manager” on page 141.
MS Services MS: Enables viewing the MSs in the network, providing links to relevant management applications. Refer to “MS Manager” on page 146.
MS Connection Maintenance: In the current release applicable only for certain 4Motion devices. Enables display of data for a single MS or for all MSs served by a specific ASN-GW. Enables also forced de-registration of a single or multiple MSs. Refer to “MS Manager” on page 146.
Menu Option
AlvariSTAR User Manual 8
Chapter 1 - IntroductionThe NMS Client ScreenChapter 1 - Introduction The NMS Client Screen
Management Discovery: Not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility. Enables managing IP address ranges or subnets and global SNMP Read and Write community pairs to be used for discovery of network elements. Refer to “Discovery Manager” on page 166.
Data Files: Enables managing configuration and performance files stored in the database. Refer to “Data Files Manager” on page 174.
Contacts: Enabling managing contacts for managed network elements. Refer to “The Contacts Manager” on page 188.
Tasks: Enables managing system-wide operations and product line dependent tasks. Refer to “The Tasks Manager” on page 194.
Preferences: Enables setting values for certain global parameters, defining parameters for connecting to other management applications, defining charts/graphs to be displayed in the Home page, and initiating certain import/export actions of files with location details of MSs or GPS coordinates information. Refer to “Preferences Manager” on page 231.
Menu Option
AlvariSTAR User Manual 9
Chapter 1 - IntroductionThe NMS Client ScreenChapter 1 - Introduction The NMS Client Screen
Administration Users: Enables managing users and associated details such as passwords, profile membership and contact information. Refer to “Users Manager” on page 253.
User Profiles: Not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility. Enables managing user profiles and functional permissions assigned to them. Refer to “User Profiles Manager” on page 269.
User Sessions: Not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility. Enables viewing information on the currently logged in users, sending messages to logged in users or terminating sessions. Refer to “User Sessions Manager” on page 279.
Audit Logs: Enables viewing recorded events related to the management system’s database and exporting the logged data to an external Comma Separated Value (CSV) file. Refer to “The Audit Logs Manager” on page 282.
Licenses: Not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility. Enables viewing information about existing licenses, adding new licenses and activating a new license. Refer to “Licenses Manager” on page 285.
Password Policy: Enables setting general policies for user passwords. Refer to “Password Policy Manager” on page 290.
User Domains: Enables allocating location visibility domains to each user that is not an administrator (administrators are always able to see all network elements in every location). Refer to“User Domain Manager” on page 293.
External Entities Mapping: Applicable only if LDAP connection is enabled. Enables mapping existing LDAP entities to specific user profiles (if an external LDAP server is used for user account management). Refer to “External Entities Mapping Manager” on page 295.
StarSuite Report: Enables generating various inventory and configuration reports. Refer to “Reports Manager” on page 299.
Charts: Enables viewing and managing various graphs and charts providing summary status information for all managed devices. Refer to “Charts Manager” on page 308.
StarQuality: A cut-through link that enables opening StarQuality (if available) in a separate window.
StarACS: A cut-through link that enables opening StarACS (if available) in a separate window.
Menu Option
AlvariSTAR User Manual 10
Chapter 1 - IntroductionThe NMS Client ScreenChapter 1 - Introduction The NMS Client Screen
1.5.3 Status & Info
The Status & Info section is located at the upper right corner of the application screens, and contains the
following components:
The name of the logged in user. Click on the user name to open a drop-down menu enabling
selection of the Change Password option (see “Changing the Password” on page 22)
Licensing: Click to open a drop-down menu enabling selection of the Properties option for displaying
Licensing Information (details of IP Addresses and associated MAC Addresses of the server). The IP
and MAC addresses applicable for the management system are colored blue.
Logout icon ( ): Click to logout.
Help icon ( ): Click to open the context sensitive on-line help.
1.5.4 Main Area
The Main area provides a user-friendly workspace for the currently active management function,
displaying main details of relevant elements and enabling selection of elements for executing various
actions.
Typically a grid view is used to display the relevant information, with a separate line for each relevant
entity.
The appearance and content of the grid view table may be manipulated to supports specific user
preferences. For details refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18.
The contents of the table are refreshed using up-to-date database information on the following
occasions:
Tab is opened for the first time.
A previously-opened tab is selected as the active one.
Automatic periodic table content refresh is supported for the active tab only.
Any sort / un-sort user action.
Any action in the Find panel.
Page size change.
Help About: Opens the About window displaying details about installed management system components. Refer to “The About Window” on page 21.
Help Contents: Opens the WebHelp contents window.
Menu Option
AlvariSTAR User Manual 11
Chapter 1 - IntroductionThe NMS Client ScreenChapter 1 - Introduction The NMS Client Screen
1.5.5 Details Panel
Certain management functions include a Details panel, located below the main area. The Details panels
provides additional details for one or (in certain management functions) several entries selected in the
main area.
To minimize the Details panel (and increase the size of the main area), click on the down-pointing red
arrow located on the upper left corner of the panel. To maximize it again to its’ original size, click on the
up-pointing red arrow that is now located at the bottom of the screen.
1.5.6 Find Panel
The Find panel enables filtering the contents displayed in the Main Area according to a set of conditions.
The typical Find panel comprises some or all of the following search/filter options:
Simple Search
Saved Filters
Advanced Filtering
Pre-Defined Filters
The contents displayed in the Main Area will match all the criteria defined by any of these search/filter
options (AND operation among all applicable search/filter options).
To minimize the Find panel (and increase the size of the main area), click on the left-pointing red arrow
located on the upper right corner of the panel. To maximize it again to its’ original size, click on the
right-pointing red arrow that is now located at the left side of the screen.
Figure 1-3: Find Panel (Discovery Manager)
AlvariSTAR User Manual 12
Chapter 1 - IntroductionThe NMS Client ScreenChapter 1 - Introduction The NMS Client Screen
1.5.6.1 Simple Search
The Simple Search option enables searching for entities that contain a specified text string (case
in-sensitive) in relevant column(s).
For example, in the Equipment manager type the string “ab” in the Search text box and click on the Find
icon ( ) to search for all devices that include the string “ab” in their Name column. Only devices that
meet this criterion (and, if applicable, criteria defined by other filtering options) will be displayed.
Clear the text box to remove the search criterion.
1.5.6.2 Saved Filters
The Saved Filters section enables managing saved filters. A saved filter includes all the filtering criteria in
the Advanced Filters and/or Pre-Defined Filters sections that were defined when it was saved. If both
Advanced Filters and Pre-Defined Filters are used, filtering is based on an AND operation among all
defined filtering criteria.
Use the following icons to manage saved filters:
The Saved Filters sections provides the following options:
1 Define the required filtering criteria in the Advanced Filter and/or Pre-Defined Filter sections.
2 Enter the new filter name in the Type Filter Name field.
3 Click on the Save Filter icon.
1 Enter the filter name in the Type Filter Name field, or click on the Load Filter icon to open a list of
previously saved filters and selected the required filter.
Icon Description
Delete Filter
Load Filter
Save Filter
Clear Filter
To save a new filter:
To apply a previously saved filter:
AlvariSTAR User Manual 13
Chapter 1 - IntroductionThe NMS Client ScreenChapter 1 - Introduction The NMS Client Screen
2 Click Apply to apply the selected filter.
To clear the currently applied filter click on the Clear Filter icon.
1 Enter the filter name in the Type Filter Name field, or click on the Load Filter icon to open a list of
previously saved filters and selected the required filter.
2 Click on the Delete Filter icon to delete the selected filter.
1 Enter the filter name in the Type Filter Name field, or click on the Load Filter icon to open a list of
previously saved filters and selected the required filter.
2 Edit the definitions in Advanced Filters and/or Pre-Defined Filters.
3 Click on the Save Filter icon.
1 Enter the existing filter name in the Type Filter Name field, or click on the Load Filter icon to open a list
of previously saved filters and selected the required filter.
2 Edit the definitions in Advanced Filters and/or Pre-Defined Filters.
3 Enter the new filter name in the Type Filter Name field.
4 Click on the Save Filter icon.
1.5.6.3 Advanced Filtering
The Advanced Filtering option enables definition of filters based on multiple criteria.
1 Click on Add Criteria action link.
To clear an applied filter:
To delete a previously saved filter:
To edit a previously saved filter:
To create a new saved filter based on an existing saved filter:
To define a new criterion:
AlvariSTAR User Manual 14
Chapter 1 - IntroductionThe NMS Client ScreenChapter 1 - Introduction The NMS Client Screen
2 A list with possible options (tab-specific) is opened, allowing selection of a criterion. Select the
required criterion to open the configuration dialog for the new criterion. The configuration dialog
section includes the Criterion’s name field, Operator selection field and value field(s). You may change
the selected criterion by clicking on the drop-down list icon on the right side of the Criterion’s name
and selecting a different one.
3 Select the required Operator. Available Operators depend on the selected criterion (see below details
on Operator types).
4 According to the selected Operator, define the relevant value(s.)
5 To add an additional criterion, click on Add Criterion and repeat step 2 - 4 above.
6 To remove a criterion, click on the drop-down list icon on the right side of the criterion’s name and
select the remove option.
7 To apply the selected criteria, click on Apply.
If multiple criteria are defined, filtering will be based on an AND operation among the different criteria
(including selected criteria in the Pre-Defined Filters described below, if applicable).
Available Operators depend on selected criterion. Possible Operators are:
Equal: A single value should be defined, either as a text string (case in-sensitive) or from a list of fixed
values. Filtered list will include only entities where the information in the relevant column matches
exactly the configured value.
In: Multiple values can be defined, either as a free text strings (case in-sensitive) or from a list of fixed
values. Use the >> and << buttons to ad/remove values to/from the list. Filtered list will include only
entities where the information in the relevant column matches exactly any of the configured value.
Like: Allows the use of a wildcard character (*) with a text string (case in-sensitive). For example, for
the Name criterion, define the string “*ab*” to search for all entities that include the string ab
anywhere in their Name. Define the string “ab*” to search for all entities that include the string ab at
the beginning of their Name.
Between: Applicable for criteria such as IP address or date, allowing to define a range of values (from
- to). For dates, specify start date and end date. You can either enter the dates in the relevant text
boxes or click on the down arrow sign to open the calendar for date selection. End date must be
higher than start date. Filtered list will include only entities where the information in the relevant
column is in the defined range.
Is Empty: Filtered list will include only entities where the information in the relevant column is null.
Applicable for the Name and Location columns in the Equipment manager, enabling identification of
devices without a configured name or without an assigned location.
To modify the configuration of an advanced filter:
AlvariSTAR User Manual 15
Chapter 1 - IntroductionThe NMS Client ScreenChapter 1 - Introduction The NMS Client Screen
1 To change a criterion, click on the drop-down list icon on the right side of the criterion’s name and
select a different criterion from the list. Select Operator and relevant value(s).
2 To add a criterion, click on Add Criteria, select required criterion, Operator and relevant value(s).
3 To remove a criterion, click on the drop-down list icon on the right side of the criterion’s name and
select the remove option.
4 After completing all changes, click Apply.
1.5.6.4 Pre-Defined Filters
Pre-defined Filters are tab-specific and include one or several groups of filtering criteria. The relevant
filtering criterion is presented as the filtering group’s header.
Each group may include several filtering options, with a selection checkbox next to each option.
In some cases all possible options are displayed, regardless of the current contents of the Main Area. In
some other cases only valid options (according to the current contents of the Main Area) are displayed.
For example, in the Equipment tab the list of Alarm State options includes only valid options according
to the current contents of the Equipment list (if there is no device whose Alarm State is Critical, the
Critical option will not be included in the options list). Where applicable, the filtering option will be
accompanied by the number of entities that meet the specific filtering option. According to the
properties of the specific criterion, you may select either only one or several options.
You may use the toggling down/up arrow to the right of the group’s name header to hide/expose the
entire list of options.
When several options in the same group are selected (if multiple selection is supported for the specific
group), filtering will be based on an OR operation among the selected options.
When options in two or more groups are selected, filtering will be based on an AND operation among
the selected groups.
Filtering is applied on the fly, immediately upon selection of option(s).
1.5.7 Actions Panel
The Actions panel contains a list of possible actions that may be carried on entities selected in the main
area.
For certain managers, availability of certain actions depend on the installed device driver(s).
Some actions may be non-relevant and indicated as such under certain conditions, such as:
The action is not applicable for the selected entity type.
The action is not applicable for multiple selected entities.
The action is not applicable multiple selected entities of different types.
The action is not applicable due to current conditions of selected single or multiple entities.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 16
Chapter 1 - IntroductionThe Home PageChapter 1 - Introduction The Home Page
To minimize the Actions panel (and increase the size of the main area), click on the right-pointing arrow
located on the upper left corner of the panel. To maximize it again to its’ original size, click on the
left-pointing arrow that is now located at the right side of the screen.
1.5.8 Management Systems Icons
Located on the lower right corner of the application screen, these icons provide status information on
StarQuality ( ) and StarACS ( ) management applications and enable direct links to these
applications.
The color of the icon indicates the status of the relevant application:
Green: The application’s server is installed and running properly.
Red: The server down or one of its’ components is down.
Grey: The application is not configured (see “Application Configuration” on page 232).
Place the mouse over an icon to view additional status details.
Click on a green colored icon to open the main page of the relevant application.
1.6 The Home Page
By default, when the application is opened the Home page is displayed.
The Home page provides a high level graphical view of the system, such as general inventory details and
network fault status information. It includes six zones for different charts/graphs. For details on selecting
Figure 1-4: The Home Page
AlvariSTAR User Manual 17
Chapter 1 - IntroductionUsing the Grid ViewChapter 1 - Introduction Using the Grid View
the chart/graph to be displayed in each zone and the information provided by each chart/graph refer to
“Homepage” on page 247.
1.7 Using the Grid View
This section includes:
Selecting/De-selecting Entities
Dynamic Columns Selection
Rearranging and Resizing Columns
Sorting
Using the Master Table Control
Page Control Bar
1.7.1 Selecting/De-selecting Entities
The left-most column of each row contains a checkbox, indicating whether the entity is selected or not.
To select a single row, click anywhere in the row. All other rows will be de-selected.
For multiple rows selection/de-selection, including rows in different pages, use the traditional Shift-Click
and Ctrl-Click selection/de-selection methods. You may also select/de-selected rows one by one by
clicking on the checkbox.
To select/de-select all rows in the current page, use the master checkbox in the headers row.
When multiple rows are selected, click on a row to de-select all other rows in the same page.
1.7.2 Dynamic Columns Selection
Right-click on a table header to displays a list of all the columns that are available in the table (in many
tables only a sub-set of available columns is selected by default). Select the columns that you wish to
display and de-select the columns that you want to hide.
This columns selection is available also upon clicking on the master table control icon ( ) located on
the right side of the headers row (see more details in Using the Master Table Control below).
1.7.3 Rearranging and Resizing Columns
To rearrange column sequence, click and drag a column header to the new desired position (not
applicable for the checkbox column and, if relevant, to entity status icon column).
INFORMATION
The following section is not applicable for tables in a Device Manager. For details on working with device configuration tables refer to “Working with Configuration Tables” on page 25.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 18
Chapter 1 - IntroductionUsing the Grid ViewChapter 1 - Introduction Using the Grid View
Typically the width of all rows is adjusted automatically to display all relevant information. To resize a
column, position the cursor on the border line between two columns headings. The cursor changes into
a double-headed arrow. Click and drag the cursor to the left or to the right to increase or decrease the
size of a column.
1.7.4 Sorting
By default, table are sorted according to the order of being added to the database of the management
system.
Place the mouse pointer over a column header. A small drop-down list icon will be displayed on the right
side of the header. Click on the drop-down list icon to open the sorting selection list.
Select the Sort Ascending option to sort the table by the selected column in ascending order.
Select the Sort Descending option to sort the table by the selected column in descending order.
Select Clear Sorting to clear all sorting. The table will revert to its default sorting method.
After selecting any of the options above, multi-level custom sorting configuration (see “Using the
Master Table Control” on page 19) will be cleared.
Alternatively, click on any of the column headings to sort the table by the selected column. Click again
on a column heading to toggle between ascending and descending sorting order.
An up/down arrow on the right side of relevant header’s names will indicate the columns used for
sorting and the sorting method being used.
1.7.5 Using the Master Table Control
Click on the master table control icon ( ) located on the right side of the headers row to open the
drop-down menu offering the following options:
Figure 1-5: Sorting Selection List
AlvariSTAR User Manual 19
Chapter 1 - IntroductionUsing the Grid ViewChapter 1 - Introduction Using the Grid View
Columns Selection Check-boxes: A list of all available columns allowing to select/de-select columns
(identical to the functionality available for right-click on any header).
Horizontal Scroll Checkbox: Horizontal scrolling is enabled (selected) by default. De-select to disable
horizontal scrolling and hide the horizontal scroll bar. The width of all currently selected columns will
be adjusted to fit in the available space.
Pack All Columns: Resizes all columns to the minimum width that still fits the content of each column.
Pack Selected Column: Resizes the currently selected column to its minimum width that still fits all its
content.
Custom Sort: Opens the Sort Configuration window, enabling to configure multi-level sorting (sort by
... than sort by .... than sort by, up to 3 sorting levels):
1 Click on the drop-down list icon on the right side of the Sort By selection box to open a list
containing all possible column names, and select the column to be used for first level soaarting.
Figure 1-6: Master Table Control Options (MS Manager)
Figure 1-7: Sort Configuration Window
AlvariSTAR User Manual 20
Chapter 1 - IntroductionThe About WindowChapter 1 - Introduction The About Window
2 Click on the drop-down menu icon on the right side of the Sort Order selection box to open a list
enabling selection between sorting methods (Ascending, Descending, Unsorted) and select the
required first level sorting method.
3 For second level sorting, click on the Add Level button. Sort By and Sort Order for second level
sorting will be displayed. Repeat steps 1 and 2 above for second level sorting.
4 For third level sorting, click on the Add Level button. Sort By and Sort Order for third level sorting
will be displayed. Repeat steps 1 and 2 above for third level sorting.
5 To remove the last configured sorting level (excluding first level sorting), click on the Remove Level
button.
6 Click OK to apply the sorting configuration and close the window.
7 An up/down arrow on the right side of relevant headers’ names will indicate the columns used for
sorting and the sorting method being used.
1.7.6 Page Control Bar
The Page Control Bar is displayed for certain tabs at the bottom of the main area (below the table).
When the number of rows exceeds the number defined in the Page Size box, the results are divided into
several pages. Click on the drop-down list icon on the right side of the Page Size box to see view all
possible options and select a different page size if required.
The total numbers of items (rows) and pages are indicated on the right side of the Page Control Bar. Use
the following controls on the left side of the Page Control Bar to browse between the various pages, or
select directly the required page number in the displayed list of pages:
1.8 The About Window
The About window displays a list of all products installed and their software version.
To open the About window, select Help > About in the Main Menu.
Figure 1-8: Page Control Bar
Icon Description
First/Previous - Cycles back to the first or previous page.
Next/Last - Cycles forward to the next or last page.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 21
Chapter 1 - IntroductionChanging the PasswordChapter 1 - Introduction Changing the Password
The version numbers of the management system and the installed product line device driver(s) are in the
format a.b.c.d, where a.b increases for major releases, c increases for minor releases and d is an internal
control number.
1.9 Changing the Password
To change your password, select the Change Password option in the <User Name> drop-down menu
(see “Status & Info” on page 11).
1 Enter the new password (5-32 characters)
2 Confirm the new password.
3 Click Finish to save the new password.
Figure 1-9: About Window
Figure 1-10: Reset Password Window
To change the password:
AlvariSTAR User Manual 22
Chapter 1 - IntroductionCommon Control Buttons/IconsChapter 1 - Introduction Common Control Buttons/Icons
Refer to “Password Policy Manager” on page 290 for details on passwords policy including password
constraints.
1.10 Common Control Buttons/Icons
A control button/icon causes an immediate action. To activate a control button/icon, click on it. Certain
control buttons/icons only appear in selected windows/dialog boxes. Others are common to most
windows.
1.11 Single Device Configuration (Device Manager)
This section includes:
Accessing the Device Manager
The Device Manager Components
Common Control Buttons
Working with Configuration Tables
1.11.1 Accessing the Device Manager
The Device Manager enables managing a single device and its components (if applicable).
Button/Icon Description
Apply Applies changes made in the window. Clicking the Apply button maintains the window opened for the following transaction or response delivery.
OK Applies changes made in the window and closes the window.
Cancel Closes the active window without taking any further action. Any modifications made prior to clicking Cancel are ignored.
Refresh Refreshes the window and displays the most updated information from the database of the management system.
Save Saves changes made in the dialog box.
Help
Displays the online context sensitive help window.
Open Selector
The Open Selector button appears whenever the command’s completion may need an additional selection step. Clicking this button displays another window that lets you select an entry for an adjacent field.
Eraser
Clears adjacent field. It appears next to a field with an Open Selector button at the other end.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 23
Chapter 1 - IntroductionSingle Device Configuration (Device Manager)Chapter 1 - Introduction Single Device Configuration (Device Manager)
The Device Manager for a selected device can be opened from any of the following managers:
Equipment
Active Events
Event History
In the Manager, select the relevant entity and click on the Configure button. The BTS <BTS_Number>
tab is added to the tabs ribbon and the Device Manager for the selected entity opens, displaying the
main page for the device manager.
1.11.2 The Device Manager Components
The Device Manager window comprises the following components:
To open the Device Manager for a selected device:
Figure 1-11: The Device Manager Components
Component Description
Page Name The name of the current page.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 24
Chapter 1 - IntroductionSingle Device Configuration (Device Manager)Chapter 1 - Introduction Single Device Configuration (Device Manager)
1.11.3 Common Control Buttons
The following icons and buttons are common to most configuration/information pages.
1.11.4 Working with Configuration Tables
In some pages, tables are used for displaying information and for configuring and managing multiple
entities of the same type.
Grayed-out cells are read-only.
To rearrange column sequence, click and drag a column header to the new desired position.
Typically the width of all rows is adjusted automatically to display all relevant information. To resize a
column, position the cursor on the border line between two columns headings. The cursor changes into
Navigation Pane Displays all configuration/information pages and enables opening a selected page by clicking on it. Use the Hide/View icons on the left side of each option to hide/view sub-options.
Tab Selection Enables selection among tabs in pages with two or more tabs.
Selected Page The selected page. Enables viewing/managing the applicable parameters
Status Indicates the status of the current operation (Applying/Refreshing/Done).
Progress Bar Indicates an “in progress” operation.
Icon/Button Description
Help Opens the Help Navigator and Help Topic Window for the page.
Refresh from Device Updates the information displayed in the page according to current values acquired from the device
Updates the information displayed in the page according to current values acquired from the database of the management system
Implements the modifications to the configuration of the device. Exiting the Device Manager or switching to another page without applying discards the changes.
This button is not available in information pages that display read-only details and do not include any configurable parameters.
To re-arrange and/or re-size columns:
Component Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 25
Chapter 1 - IntroductionSingle Device Configuration (Device Manager)Chapter 1 - Introduction Single Device Configuration (Device Manager)
a double-headed arrow. Click and drag the cursor to the left or to the right to increase or decrease the
size of a column.
Click on the master table control icon ( ) located on the right side of the headers row to open the
drop-down menu offering the following options:
Columns Selection Check-boxes: A list of all available columns allowing to select/de-select columns.
Horizontal Scroll Checkbox: Horizontal scrolling is enabled (selected) by default. De-select to disable
horizontal scrolling and hide the horizontal scroll bar. The width of all currently selected columns will
be adjusted to fit in the available space.
Pack All Columns: When the table exceeds the width of the available work area, this option attempts
to fit it into the available space by reducing the columns’ widths.
Pack Selected Column: Resizes the currently selected column to its minimum width that still fits all its
content.
Double-click on the applicable cell: In a text-cell, edit the content. In some cells a drop-down menu will
open, enabling selection of the required option. Click on any other cell to apply the change to the
selected cell. At this stage the change is applied only to the display, and the displayed parameters of the
modified entry are colored blue. The change is applied to the device only after clicking on the Apply
button.
Click on the Add button. A new row will be added. Some parameters may be set to their default values,
allowing (if applicable) modification to other values. Configure the required parameters. At this stage
the change is applied only to the display, and the displayed parameters of the new entry are colored
green. The change is applied to the device only after clicking on the Apply button.
Select the entities you want to delete and click on the Delete button. At this stage the change is applied
only to the display, and the displayed parameters of the entries to be deleted are colored red. The
change is applied to the device only after clicking on the Apply button.
To use the Master Table Control:
To modify the configuration of an existing entity:
To add a new entity (if applicable):
To delete one or several entities (if applicable):
AlvariSTAR User Manual 26
Chapter 2 - The Equipment Manager
In This Chapter:
“Introduction to the Equipment Manager” on page 28
“Switching between Grid and Map Views” on page 29
“Equipment List Grid View” on page 29
“Map View” on page 31
“Equipment Details” on page 36
“Equipment Actions Panel” on page 43
“Find Equipment Panel” on page 46
“Network Element Discovery” on page 47
“The Network Element Editor” on page 50
“The Common attributes Editor” on page 54
“Real-Time Performance Viewer” on page 55
“Configuration History Request and Report” on page 59
“The Equipment Selector Window” on page 61
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerIntroduction to the Equipment ManagerChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Introduction to the Equipment Manager
2.1 Introduction to the Equipment Manager
The Equipment manager provides a view of all devices that can be managed by the specific user, with
some general information on managed devices and access to various functions that enable
comprehensive management of equipment in the network.
Select the Equipment tab header in the tabs ribbon. The Equipment manager is displayed. The default
view in the Main Area is grid view of the Equipment List.
INFORMATIONUsers with Administrators privileges can manage all network elements in all locations. The network elements that can be managed by other users may be limited according to the assigned domains. For details refer to “User Domain Manager” on page 293.
To open the Equipment Manager:
Figure 2-1: Equipment List View
INFORMATION The Equipment tab header may include a red oval with the number of devices with open critical summarized alarm (or critical highest severity alarm if summarized alarm is not supported). If there are no devices with critical alarms the red oval will not be displayed. The list of relevant equipment for this indication includes all the devices that can be managed by the specific user and is not affected by any settings in the Find panel.
INFORMATION Applications running on different NMS clients bound to the same server are notified of the changes made by other clients in the equipment list. The equipment list will be automatically updated whenever another client on the network modifies (adds, deletes or edits) equipment data that affects the contents of the database.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 28
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerSwitching between Grid and Map ViewsChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Switching between Grid and Map Views
2.2 Switching between Grid and Map Views
The Grid ( ) and Map ( ) icons on the right top corner of the main area enable selecting the
information view mode.
The default view is grid view. Map view is available only for users with View Map privileges that are
assigned the Map Users User Profile.
2.3 Equipment List Grid View
The Equipment List grid view comprises a table that by default includes all the equipment objects that
exist in the database of the management system that can be managed by the specific user. This includes
all relevant devices that were actually discovered by the management system. The default sorting is
according to discovery time.
Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.
By default, the information displayed for each device includes:
INFORMATIONBy default the application is supplied with a license for two Map Users (the Map Users User Profile cannot be assigned to more than two users). If needed, contact the supplier for details on increasing the number of licensed Map Users.
Parameter Description
Equipment Icon An equipment icon whose color is according to summarized alarm severity or highest alarm severity (if summarized alarm is not supported) of the specific device:
Critical: Red
Major: Orange
Minor: Yellow
Warning: Blue
Indeterminate: Purple
Other: Grey
Cleared: Green
The Icon column can be used for sorting the table by alarm severity. However, unlike other columns, has a fixed width and it cannot be moved or deleted.
Name The device’s Name as configured in the device.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 29
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerEquipment List Grid ViewChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Equipment List Grid View
Type The device’s type.
SW Version The currently running SW version. Applicable only for devices that are Up or that were reached previously.
Release Number The formal release number of the running SW version.
IP Address The IP address of the device.
Location The location of the device as defined in the database of the management system, either by the system during discovery (see “The Locations Manager” on page 95 and “Discovery Task” on page 219) or manually using either the Network Element Editor (see “The Network Element Editor” on page 50) or the Common Attributes Editor for multiple devices (see “The Common attributes Editor” on page 54).
Management Status The management status of the device:
Managed - The equipment is answering to keep-alive/polling and synchronization.
Unreachable - A device that the management system is aware of (exists in the database) but cannot be reached currently.
Unknown - This is typically a temporary status for a device that its current status is unknown. After a short time its status should change to one of the other options.
Unlicensed - If the number of devices of a certain type in the database has reached the number of licenses for managing the specific device type, additional devices of this type added to the database will be presented as unlicensed. These devices cannot be managed by the system (unless the Management Status of other devices is changed to Unmanaged). For more details about adding new licenses refer to “Licenses Manager” on page 285.
Unmanageable - Equipment is reachable but cannot be managed from various reasons: wrong SW version, synch errors, no route, etc.
Unmanaged - Operator does not want to manage an equipment, although it is discovered. For details see the Manage/Un-manage option in “Administration” on page 44.
Operational Status This column indicates the device’s operational status:
Disabled - The Management State is other than Managed, or the Management State is Managed and the device is totally inoperable and unable to provide service to the user(s).
Enabled - The Management State is Managed and the device is partially or fully operable and available for use.
BTS Number The BTS Number (Site ID) configured in the device.
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 30
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerMap ViewChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Map View
2.4 Map View
This section includes:
Switching to Map View
Map View Controls
Map Overlay
Selecting/De-selecting Devices in Map View
Viewing Neighbors
Viewing MSs
Key Performance Indicators
2.4.1 Switching to Map View
In the Equipment list, select one or several devices and click on the Map icon. The Map view will be
displayed with the selected devices’ icons. Zoom and center point of the displayed map shall be
automatically adjusted for optimal display of all selected devices (provide coordinates are available for
the selected devices).
2.4.2 Map View Controls
The standard map view controls are located on the top left corner of the map:
Figure 2-2: Map View
AlvariSTAR User Manual 31
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerMap ViewChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Map View
2.4.3 Map Overlay
Devices with known coordinates are presented on the map by suitable icons. Icon’s color shall represent
summarized alarm severity (or highest alarm severity) of the specific device, using the standard set of
colors:
Critical: Red
Major: Orange
Minor: Yellow
Warning: Blue
Indeterminate: Purple
Other: Grey
Cleared: Green
For co-located (or nearly-located) devices, the number of devices is displayed on the icon, with icon color
according the highest alarm severity. You can click on the icon to open separate icons for the
co-located/nearly-located devices.
Table 2-1: Map View Controls
Control Description
Pan Click once to pan the map in the selected direction. To pan continuously, click and hold in the required direction. Alternatively, click and hold anywhere in the map area and drag in the required direction.
Zoom In (-)/Zoom Out (+) Click once to zoom in/zoom out. You can also place the mouse over the Zoom In/Zoom Out controls to open the zoom slider.
View Type selection Place the mouse over the selected view type to open the view type selection window. The available views are:
Road
Bird’s eye (enabling control of showing/hiding labels and of angled views)
Automatic (best view type according to zoom in/out status)
The default is Bird’s eye with show labels enabled and show angled view disabled.
Find Address Enables viewing a specific address on the map. Click to open the address definition window. Specify Address, City and Country and click OK to initiate a Bing task for geolocating the address and showing it as the center point of the map. If the geolocation finding process returned several possible results, a list with all the results (address and coordintates) will be displayed, enabling selection of the preferred one.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 32
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerMap ViewChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Map View
Place the mouse pointer over a BTS icon to open an information bubble with BTS details (ID, Name, NE
Type, IP Address and Alarm Status).
For each device (excluding the Mini-Centralized ASN-GW), the associated BSs (sectors) are presented as
equilateral triangles pointing outward of the BTS icon, at the approximate sector’s heading and width as
defined in the device. In the current release, the sector’s icon size represents a fixed radio range: 500
meters for 4Motion/COMPACT, 2 Km for Extreme. BS’s sector color is according to the current value of
selected Key Performance Indicator (KPI) For more details refer to Key Performance Indicators below.
Place the mouse pointer over a sector to open an information bubble with BS details (KPI, KPI Value, KPI
Scale, BS ID and Sector Name including main sector association details).
2.4.4 Selecting/De-selecting Devices in Map View
A selected device is indicated by two blue rings circling the icon. By default, all devices selected before
switching to map view are displayed as selected on the map.
To select a single device, click on its icon. All other devices will be de-selected.
To select multiple de-selected devices, click on each device’s icon with the Ctrl key pressed.
To de-select a selected device, click on the device’s icon with the Ctrl key pressed.
2.4.5 Viewing Neighbors
For a single selected device, select the Radio tab in the Details panel (see “Equipment Details Radio Tab”
on page 40) and click on the Show Neighbors Action for the relevant sector (applicable only for
4Motion/COMPACT devices) to visualize the sectors (BSs) associated as neighbors to the selected sector
(B)S. If there are any neighbor(s) defined for the sector, the system zooms and moves the map to an
appropriate resolution and location so that each involved sector is clearly visible, and displays a
highlighting animation of the sector together with its neighbors for several seconds by drawing the
contour of the involved sectors.
2.4.6 Viewing MSs
For a single selected device, select the Radio tab in the Details panel (see “Equipment Details Radio Tab”
on page 40) and select the Show MSs check-box(es) to display the MSs served by the relevant sector(s).
The default is de-selected (MSs not shown). You may also display a selected MS by selecting the Show
on MAP action in the MS Manager (see “MS Actions Panel” on page 148). Only “connected” MSs are
displayed: “Connected” 4Motion/COMPACT CPEs include all CPEs available in the database of
StarQuality that had at least one collection in the last 24 hours (including CPEs not available in the
database of StarACS). “Connected” Extreme CPEs include all CPEs available in the database of
AlvariSTAR (including CPEs not available in the database of StarACS). Icons for MSs with a known
geolocation served by the sector are displayed in their defined geolocations (for details on geolocating
MSs refer to “MS Coordinates Import” on page 240. For MSs without a known geolocation, an MS icon
is displayed at the center of the serving sector’s area. A single icon is shown for two or more MSs
without a known geolocation or in the same geolocation, with the number of MSs indicated on the
icon.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 33
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerMap ViewChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Map View
For a single MS, place the mouse pointer over the MS icon to open a bubble with its details (Serial
Number, MAC Address, BS ID, SW Version).
For an icon indicating two or more MSs, click on the icon to view MS(s) details:
If the number indicating the quantity of MSs is higher than 10, a bubble with MSs Information table
opens displaying main details for each MSs. By default the table is sorted by ascending order of MSs
Serial Number.
If the number is 10 or lower, the MSs display is “expanded” with an icon for each MS. Place the
mouse pointer over a MS icon to open a bubble with its details.
2.4.7 Key Performance Indicators
BS’s sector color is according to its current Key Performance Indicator (KPI) value. Refer to “Sector’s Color
based on KPI” on page 239 for details on selecting the KPI to be used for each device family.
This section includes:
4Motion/COMPACT Key Performance Indicators
Extreme Key Performance Indicators
2.4.7.1 4Motion/COMPACT Key Performance Indicators
KPIs for 4Motion/COMPACT devices are based on information recorded in StarQuality for the last
15-minutes period for which there is available data regarding the relevant BS.
Available KPIs are:
DL Air Link Utilization, Data Zone
SINR Distribution Downlink - SINR (SINR distribution Downlink less than 5dB)
DL Throughput Total
Details on representative colors are shown below:
Table 2-2: 4Motion/COMPACT KPIs and Representative Colors
KPI Units Value Color
SINR Distribution Downlink - SINR % 0-10 Green
10-20 Yellow
20-30 Orange
30-40 Red
40-50 Purple
50 and above Blue
AlvariSTAR User Manual 34
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerMap ViewChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Map View
BS sectors are presented as a hollow triangle (Black line, no fill) in the following cases:
1 StarQuality is not included in the specific installation or is not running properly.
2 StarQuality does not have data regarding the specific BS in the last 15-minutes period.
2.4.7.2 Extreme Key Performance Indicators
KPIs for Extreme devices are based on real-time counters taken by the management system every 5
minutes from each device using SNMP. Details on KPIs and their representative colors are shown below.
DL Air Link Utilization, Data Zone % 0-30 Green
30-50 Yellow
50-70 Orange
70-80 Red
80-90 Purple
90-100 Blue
DL Throughput Total bps Above 8,000,000 Green
3,000,001-8,000,000 Yellow
2,000,001-3,000,000 Orange
1,000,001-2,000,000 Red
500,000-1,000,000 Purple
0-500,000 Blue
Table 2-3: Extreme KPI Details
KPI Description
UL NACK Uplink NACK rate. Computed using the following formula:
UL NACK = 100*SUM(NACK Frames/ACK Frames)/Number of MSs.
where:
NACK Frames=number of non-acknowledged uplink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.
ACK Frames= number of acknowledged uplink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.
Note: if for a certain MS number of acknowledged frames is zero, the MS shall not be taken into consideration when performing the average.
Table 2-2: 4Motion/COMPACT KPIs and Representative Colors
KPI Units Value Color
AlvariSTAR User Manual 35
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerEquipment DetailsChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Equipment Details
BS sectors are presented as a hollow triangle (black line, no fill) if the KPI value, or one of the KPI values
for max(UL, DL NACK), is not available for the last 5 minutes interval.
2.5 Equipment Details
The read-only information available in the Equipment Details section is retrieved from the management
system’s database, regardless of current Management Status and Operational State of selected device(s).
The Equipment Details section includes the following tabs:
Equipment Details Basic Tab
Equipment Details Operational Tab
DL NACK Downlink NACK rate. Computed using the following formula:
DL NACK = 100*SUM(NACK Frames/ACK Frames)/Number of MSs.
where:
NACK Frames=number of non-acknowledged downlink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.
ACK Frames= number of acknowledged downlink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.
Note: if for a certain MS number of acknowledged frames is zero, the MS shall not be taken into consideration when performing the average.
NACK DL UL Ratios The maximum value of UL NACK and DL NACK (described above).
Table 2-4: Extreme KPI Representative Colors
KPI Units Value Color
UL NACK % 0-2.9999 Green
3-9.9999 Yellow
10 and above Red
DL NACK % 0-2.9999 Green
3-9.9999 Yellow
10 and above Red
NACK DL UL Ratios % 0-2.9999 Green
3-9.9999 Yellow
10 and above Red
Table 2-3: Extreme KPI Details
KPI Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 36
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerEquipment DetailsChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Equipment Details
Equipment Details Radio Tab
Equipment Details Tasks Tab
2.5.1 Equipment Details Basic Tab
The contents of the Basic tab for a single selected device depend on the selected device type. The
following details are available:
BTS Name
BTS Number
BTS Type
IP Address
Contact Person (as defined in the database of the management system, either automatically during
discovery (see “Discovery Manager” on page 166 and “Discovery Task” on page 219) or manually
using either the Network Element Editor for a single device (see “The Network Element Editor” on
page 50) or the Common Attributes Editor for multiple devices (see “The Common attributes Editor”
on page 54).
Location (as defined in the database of the management system, either automatically during
discovery (see “Discovery Manager” on page 166 and “Discovery Task” on page 219) or manually
using either the Network Element Editor for a single device (see “The Network Element Editor” on
page 50) or the Common Attributes Editor for multiple devices (see “The Common attributes Editor”
on page 54)
GPS Type
Management Connectivity Mode (Applicable for COMPACT BTS and 4Motion devices excluding
Micro BTS)
Configured ASN Topology (Applicable for Extreme BTS and 4Motion Macro BTS/Macro BTS ODU)
Figure 2-3: Equipment Details Basic Tab (Compact Device)
AlvariSTAR User Manual 37
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerEquipment DetailsChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Equipment Details
Number of registered MSs
In addition, relevant HW properties (such as Serial Number, HW revision, types/number of different
components) and relevant SW versions/files names are also displayed. The exact contents depend on
the type of the selected device.
The contents of the Basic tab for multiple selected devices belonging to the same products family
depend on the selected device(s) type(s).
The following details are available for multiple selected devices belonging to the same products family:
BTS Type: A list of number of devices per device type.
SW Version: A list of number of devices per running SW version (COMPACT and Extreme.
Additional details available only for 4Motion devices (if applicable for any of the selected devices):
» ASN Topologies: A list of number of devices per ASN Topology.
» Running NPU SW Version: A list of number of devices per running NPU SW Version
» AU Types: A list of number of AUs per AU type.
» Running AU SW Version: A list of number of AUs per running AU SW version.
If multiple devices belonging to different products families are selected, the following details for the
selected devices are displayed per products family:
BTS Type: A list of number of devices per device type.
SW Version: A list of number of devices per running SW version.
2.5.2 Equipment Details Operational Tab
For a single selected device, the following details are displayed:
Figure 2-4: Equipment Details Basic Tab (Compact Devices)
AlvariSTAR User Manual 38
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerEquipment DetailsChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Equipment Details
Management Status: The current Management Status of the device.
Operational State: The current Operational State of the device.
Active Events table: A table displaying the currently active events of the selected device. For more
details refer to “Active Events Main Area” on page 63.
For multiple selected devices, the following details are displayed:
Management Status: Number of devices per Management Status value.
Operational State: Number of devices per Operational State value.
Alarms per Severity: Number of open alarms per severity.
BTSs per Highest Alarm: Number of devices per highest alarm (summarized alarm value if available).
Age of oldest per Severity: Age of oldest alarm per severity (excluding "Cleared").
No. of "Not Installed": Number of currently open “Not Installed” alarms (applicable only for 4Motion
Macro BTS/Macro BTS ODU).
No. of "Configuration Mismatch": Number of currently open “Configuration Mismatch” alarms
(applicable only for 4Motion devices).
Figure 2-5: Equipment Details Operational Tab (A Single Device)
Figure 2-6: Equipment Details Operational Tab (Multiple Devices)
AlvariSTAR User Manual 39
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerEquipment DetailsChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Equipment Details
2.5.3 Equipment Details Radio Tab
The contents of the Radio tab for a single selected device depend on the selected device type. The
following details are available:
Radio Operation Mode (applicable only for Extreme BTS)
BTS Topology Type (applicable only for COMPACT BTS)
Sectors details table, providing the following details for each configured sector:
» Sector Name (default column to sort by, ascending order)
» Sector Number
» Sector Heading (applicable only for COMPACT and 4Motion BTSs)
» Sector Location (applicable only for Extreme BTS)
» BS ID (Operator ID - Cell ID - Logical Sector ID, applicable only for Extreme BTS)
» BS ID LSB (applicable only for COMPACT and 4Motion BTSs)
» Center Frequency
» Bandwidth
» Maximum Tx Power
» Show MSs: Select to show in Map view the MSs served by the sector. For more details refer to
“Viewing MSs” on page 33. This option is supported only if Map Users user profile is assigned to
the user and coordinates are available for the serving BTS.
» Action: Applicable only for device types that support definition of neighbors (COMPACT and
4Motion BTSs). Click on the Show Neighbors link to temporarily display in Map view the sector
with its defined neighbors. For more details refer to “Viewing Neighbors” on page 33. This
Figure 2-7: Equipment Details Radio Tab (Single Extreme Device)
AlvariSTAR User Manual 40
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerEquipment DetailsChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Equipment Details
option is supported only if Map Users user profile is assigned to the user and coordinates are
available for the BTS.
For Mini-Centralized ASN-GWs the Radio tab is not applicable (empty).
For multiple selected devices the Radio tab is not applicable (empty).
2.5.4 Equipment Details Tasks Tab
The Tasks tab presents the task instances relevant to the selected device(s), excluding System-level tasks
(e.g. Network Scan).
Relevant task types are listed on the left side of the graphical view, grouped by task category (all
instances of a specific category, e.g. Configuration Backup or SW Upgrade, are presented in a single
row, regardless of device types)
A slide selector enables selecting one of the following values for the displayed time window size:
1 Day
2 Days (default)
5 Days
7 Days
Horizontal scroll mechanism using left & right arrows enables shifting the displayed information to
desired dates. By default the center of the window is the current date and time.
Task instances are colored as follows:
A single successful instance: Green
A single partially successful instance (e.g. SW Upgrade task-instance for multiple devices, in which the
task ended successfully for some devices and failed for other devices: Yellow
Figure 2-8: Equipment Details Tasks Tab
AlvariSTAR User Manual 41
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerEquipment DetailsChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Equipment Details
A single failed instance: Red
Multiple instances with the same result: The same color as for a single instance.
Multiple instances with different results: Striped with Green, Yellow and Red.
A future (scheduled) instances - Blue
A special icon indicates overlapping task instance (due to currently-used zoom level).
A single-task instance information shall be presented in a bubble upon mouse hovering over the specific
instance. This information shall include:
Task Category (type)
Task Name
Date & time
Result
AlvariSTAR User Manual 42
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerEquipment Actions PanelChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Equipment Actions Panel
2.6 Equipment Actions Panel
The Equipment Actions panel includes the following sections:
Configuration
Administration
View
Links
2.6.1 Configuration
The Configuration section includes the following options:
Option Action
New Initiates a discovery process for a new network element. Click to open the Network Element Discovery window to define the necessary parameters and initiate a discovery process for the defined device. For more details, see “Network Element Discovery” on page 47.
NOTE: The New option is always available, without the need to select any existing entry.
Configure Opens a BTS configuration manager for the selected device, enabling full configuration management capabilities. The name of the newly opened tab is BTS <BTS Number>. Not available if two or more devices are selected or if the Operational State of the selected device is Disabled.
Multiple Configuration Initiates a template-based multiple configuration process. Applicable only if all selected devices belong to the same products family. Opens the Template Selector window (refer to “The Template Selector Window” on page 88), allowing selection of the desired template and initiation of the Multiple Configuration task (refer to “Multiple Configuration Task” on page 225).
Edit Connectivity for a single selected device, opens the Network Element Editor for the selected device, enabling to edit NMS References (Location and Contact), SNMP parameters and coordinates details (if GPS/SNTP is not used by the device). For details see “The Network Element Editor” on page 50.
For multiple selected devices, opens the Common Attributes Editor enabling to edit the Location and Contact parameters for the selected devices. For details see “The Common attributes Editor” on page 54.
Cut Through Opens a Telnet session to the selected device in a separate window. Not available if two or more devices are selected or if the Operational State of the selected device is other than Enabled.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 43
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerEquipment Actions PanelChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Equipment Actions Panel
2.6.2 Administration
The Administration section includes the following options:
Run CLI Scripts Available only if a 4Motion device driver is installed. Applicable for all 4Motion devices excluding Micro BTS. Applicable only if all selected devices are of the same type. Opens a CLI task (Refer to the CLI Task section in the relevant Device Driver Manual), enabling execution of a CLI script file on target device(s).
Delete Deletes the selected equipment object(s) from the database. The application prompts you for confirmation. You can always rediscover deleted equipment.
Option Action
Backup Available only if all selected devices belong to the same products family. Not available if the Operational State of any of the selected devices is Disabled. Opens a Configuration Backup Task for the selected device(s), where you can add additional devices to the task. Refer to the Configuration Backup Task section in the relevant Device Driver Manual.
Restore Available only for a single selected device, provided its Operation Status is Enabled. Opens a Restore Configuration task enabling to load a selected configuration file to the target device. For more details refer to the Restore Configuration Task section in the relevant Device Driver Manual.
Collect Performance Data Available only if the installed device driver(s) include at least one device driver for a product family that support collection of file-based performance data (4Motion and COMPACT). Applicable only if all selected devices belong to the same products family. Opens the Performance Collection task for the selected devices. For more details refer to the Performance Collection Task section in the relevant Device Driver Manual.
SW Upgrade Applicable only if all selected devices belong to the same products family. Opens the SW Upgrade task for the selected devices. For more details refer to the SW Upgrade Task section in the relevant Device Driver Manual.
Export Exports the general information of the selected device(s) to an external Comma Separated Value (CSV) file. All details of selected equipment are exported, including columns that are currently hidden. Opens the Exports dialog box in which you can browse to the desired location, enter a file name, and click Export. The information for the selected device(s) is exported.
Option Action
AlvariSTAR User Manual 44
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerEquipment Actions PanelChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Equipment Actions Panel
2.6.3 View
The View section includes the following options:
2.6.4 Links
The Links section includes the following option:
Manage/Un-manage Available only for a single selected device.
For a device whose Management Status is Unmanaged - attempts to revert a manually unmanaged device to its normal management status. A temporary Unknown status will be indicated, followed by actual status.
For a device whose Management Status is Managed - manually changes the Management Status to Unmanaged. This may be used as a temporary solution for managing Unlicensed devices.
Option Action
Configuration History Available only for a single selected device, provided it belongs to a products family that support this feature (4Motion and COMPACT). Opens the Configuration History Request window, allowing to define time interval and filtering options for the Configuration History Report. For details refer to “Configuration History Request and Report” on page 59.
RT Performance Opens a the Real-Time Performance Monitoring Viewer for the selected device, enabling to view real-time performance of selected counters. The name of the newly opened tab is BTS <BTS Number> RT. Not available if two or more devices are selected or if the Operational State of the selected device is Disabled. For more details refer to “Real-Time Performance Viewer” on page 55.
Open Location Available only for a single selected device, provided it has an assigned location. Opens the logical map for the specific location. For details refer to “The Logical Location Map” on page 100.
Option Action
Performance Applicable only for installations in which StarQuality is defined and running. Available only for a single selected device. Opens a cut-through in a separate window to the StarQuality application in the specific BTS context.
Option Action
AlvariSTAR User Manual 45
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerFind Equipment PanelChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Find Equipment Panel
2.7 Find Equipment Panel
This section includes:
Regular Search/Filter View
The Hierarchy View
2.7.1 Regular Search/Filter View
For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.
The simple Search option is performed on the Name column.
Pre-defined Filters include:
Type: Available options include only equipment types that are actually available in the database. Each
Type will be accompanied by the current total number of relevant instances in the database. Multiple
selection of different Types is supported.
Alarm State: Available options include all Alarm States that are actually available for filtering (for
example, if none of the devices is in Critical Alarm State, Critical will not be included). Each Alarm
State is accompanied by the current total number of instances of this state in the database. Multiple
selection of different Alarm States is supported.
Advanced Filters include the following criteria:
Name
Running Software Version
Release Number
IP Address
Location
Management Status
Operational State
Note that the “Is Empty” operator for Name and Location enables identification of devices without a
configured name or without an assigned location.
2.7.2 The Hierarchy View
The Equipment tab allows also filtering based on equipment locations using the location-based hierarchy
view, as defined in the Location Manager.
The Equipment Manager in the Local CRAFT Utility enables managing a single BTS. To manage a new device, add it to the equipment list using the New option and change the Management Status of all other devices to Un-managed.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 46
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerNetwork Element DiscoveryChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Network Element Discovery
To switch to location-based hierarchy view, click on the Hierarchy View icon ( ) on the top of the
panel. To switch back to the regular Search/Filter view, click on the regular Search/Filter View icon ( ).
The hierarchy view displays the location-based hierarchy of the network.
Use the hide/expose sign to the left of each location with sub-locations to hide/expose all relevant
sub-locations.
You can use the free-text Find text box together with the Next and Previous buttons to find locations
that include the search string anywhere in their name.
Use the check-boxes to select required locations/sub-locations. Only devices whose location matches any
of the selected locations will be displayed in the Main Area.
By default all devices without a defined location are also displayed. De-select the Show Unallocated
check-box to remove these devices from the displayed list.
2.8 Network Element Discovery
To initiate discovery of a single device click on the New option in the Actions panel to open the Network
Element Discovery window:
Figure 2-9: Equipment Find Panel, Hierarchy View
AlvariSTAR User Manual 47
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerNetwork Element DiscoveryChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Network Element Discovery
The Network Element Discovery window for all device types includes the following parameters:
Figure 2-10: Network Element Discovery Window
Parameter Description
Protocol
Type The protocol used for managing the device. In the current release only the SNMP option is available.
SNMP Parameters
Version Indicates the SNMP protocol version used for communicating with the device. The available options are:
v1
v2c
v3
All products supported by the current release support version v2c. However, you may define either v1 or v2c - the management system will identify and use the correct version (v2c).
Agent Address The device’s IP Address.
Port The port number used by the device to communicate with the NMS. The default is 161, which is the port used by all currently manageable devices.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 48
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerNetwork Element DiscoveryChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Network Element Discovery
After configuring all necessary parameters, click on the OK button to initiate a single device discovery
process using the defines parameters. If a device that does not exist in the database, with the right
properties and belonging to a device family that can be managed by the NMS is found, and the NMS is
Retries The maximum number of retries for SNMP communication with the Device.
The default is 2 retries.
Timeout(s) The maximum time in seconds that the requesting process waits for a response from the Device before attempting a retransmission (or aborting if the maximum number of retries has been reached).
The default is 5 seconds.
SNMP Communities (only for SNMP Versions v1 and v2c)
Read community The Read community string (password) for SNMP get operations. This string is used by the SNMP agent to allow/disallow SNMP read access.
The default Read community string in the manageable devices is public.
Write community The Write community string (password) for SNMP set operations. This string is used by the SNMP agent to allow/disallow SNMP write access. The Write community can also be used for read (get) operations.
The default Write community string in the manageable devices is private.
SNMPv3 Credentials (only for SNMP Version v3)
Username Username used for authentication
Security Level Configures the authentication and privacy settings. The available options are:
NoAuth_NoPriv - Both authentication and privacy are disabled
Auth_NoPriv - Authentication is enabled and privacy is disabled
Auth_Priv - Both authentication and privacy are enabled
Authentication Algorithm
Selects the hashing algorithm applied to the authentication password. The available options are:
MD5 - Uses the Message-Digest algorithm 5
SHA - Uses the Secure Hash Algorithm
Authentication Password
Password used for authentication.
Privacy Algorithm Encryption standard used for data transmission. The available options are:
AES - Uses the Advanced Encryption Standard
DES - Uses the Data Encryption Standard
Privacy Password Encryption key used by the privacy algorithm
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 49
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerThe Network Element EditorChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager The Network Element Editor
authorized to manage it, it will be added to database and to the devices displayed in the Equipment
main area.
2.9 The Network Element Editor
This section includes:
Introduction to the Network Element Editor
General Tab
SNMP Parameters Tab
2.9.1 Introduction to the Network Element Editor
The Network Element editor enables editing NMS Reference (Location and Contact), SNMP parameters
and coordinates details (if GPS/SNTP is not used by the device) for a single device.
To open the Network Element editor select the required single device and click on the Edit Connectivity
option in the Actions panel.
The Network Element editor includes two tabs:
General Tab
SNMP Parameters Tab
AlvariSTAR User Manual 50
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerThe Network Element EditorChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager The Network Element Editor
2.9.2 General Tab
The General tab includes the following parameters:
Figure 2-11: Network Element Editor - General Tab
Parameter Description
NMS Reference
Name Read-only. This field displays the network element’s name as defined in the managed device.
Location The location associated with the device in the database of the management system (optional). Click on the Open Selector icon to open the Select location window (see “The Select location Window” on page 103) and select a location. Click the Eraser icon to clear the Location field.
Contact The contact associated with the device in the database of the management system (optional). Click on the Open Selector icon to open the Select contact window (see “The Select contact Window” on page 193) and select a contact. Click the Eraser icon to clear the Contact field.
Coordinates (useful for displaying the location of the device on a map).
GPS Status Indicates the GPS status: Enabled or No GPS.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 51
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerThe Network Element EditorChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager The Network Element Editor
2.9.3 SNMP Parameters Tab
The SNMP Parameters tab includes the following parameters:
Latitude Applicable only if GPS Status is No GPS. Use this field to manually enter the network element’s latitude coordinate. Use positive values for Northern latitudes and negative values for Southern latitudes.
Longitude Applicable only if GPS Status is No GPS. Use this field to manually enter the network element’s longitude coordinate. Use positive values for Eastern longitudes and negative values for Western longitudes.
Altitude Applicable only if GPS Status is No GPS. Use this field to manually enter the network element’s altitude in meters.
Figure 2-12: Network Element Editor - SNMP Parameters Tab
Parameter Description
SNMP Parameters
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 52
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerThe Network Element EditorChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager The Network Element Editor
Version Indicates the SNMP protocol version used for communicating with the device. The available options are:
v1
v2c
v3
All products supported by the current release support version v2c. However, you may define either v1 or v2c - the management system will identify and use the correct version (v2c).
Agent Address The device’s IP Address. Not configurable when editing the properties of an existing object.
Port The port number used by the device to communicate with the NMS. Not configurable when editing the properties of an existing object.
Retries The maximum number of retries for SNMP/TFTP communication with the Device.
The range is from 0 to 255.
The default is 2 retries.
Timeout(s) The maximum time in seconds that the requesting process waits for a response from the Device before attempting a retransmission (or aborting if the maximum number of retries has been reached).
The available range is 1 to 3600 seconds.
The default is 15 seconds.
SNMP Communities (only for SNMP Versions v1 and v2)
Read community The Read community string (password) for SNMP get operations. This string is used by the SNMP agent to allow/disallow SNMP read access.
The default Read community string in the manageable devices is public.
Write community The Write community string (password) for SNMP set operations. This string is used by the SNMP agent to allow/disallow SNMP write access. The Write community can also be used for read (get) operations.
The default Write community string in the manageable devices is private.
SNMPv3 Credentials (only for SNMP Version v3)
Username Username used for authentication
Security Level Configures the authentication and privacy settings. The available options are:
NoAuth_NoPriv - Both authentication and privacy are disabled
Auth_NoPriv - Authentication is enabled and privacy is disabled
Auth_Priv - Both authentication and privacy are enabled
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 53
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerThe Common attributes EditorChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager The Common attributes Editor
2.10 The Common attributes Editor
The Common Attributes editor enables editing the NMS References (Location and Contact) parameters
for multiple devices.
To open the Common Attributes editor select the required devices and click on the Edit Connectivity
option in the Actions panel.
The Common Attributes editor for multiple devices includes the Location and Contact parameters:
By default the Update check-boxes for both Location and Contact attributes are selected. De-select the
attribute(s) you do not want to update (otherwise, if the Update check-box is selected but the relevant
field remains empty, a currently configured attribute in any of the selected devices will be changed to
null).
Configure one or both of the followings:
Authentication Algorithm
Selects the hashing algorithm applied to the authentication password. The available options are:
MD5 - Uses the Message-Digest algorithm 5
SHA - Uses the Secure Hash Algorithm
Authentication Password
Password used for authentication. At least 8 printable characters. For security reasons the password is displayed as a string of *.
Privacy Algorithm Encryption standard used for data transmission. The available options are:
AES - Uses the Advanced Encryption Standard
DES - Uses the Data Encryption Standard
Privacy Password Encryption key used by the privacy algorithm. At least 8 printable characters. For security reasons the password is displayed as a string of *.
Figure 2-13: Common Attributes Editor
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 54
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerReal-Time Performance ViewerChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Real-Time Performance Viewer
2.11 Real-Time Performance Viewer
The Real-Time Performance Viewer provides on-line graphs of selected counters.
In the Equipment Manager, select the required device (its Operational State must be Enabled) and click
on the RT Performance action. The RT Performance viewer for the selected device will open as a new
tab named BTS <BTS Number> RT.
Parameter Description
Location The location to be associated with the devices in the database of the management system (optional). Click on the Open Selector icon to open the Select location window (see “The Select location Window” on page 103) and select a location. Click the Eraser icon to clear the Location field. If a location is selected verify that the relevant Update check-box is selected. Otherwise, verify that the relevant Update check-box is de-selected.
Contact The contact to be associated with the devices in the database of the management system (optional). Click on the Open Selector icon to open the Select contact window (see “The Select contact Window” on page 193) and select a contact. Click the Eraser icon to clear the Contact field. If a contact is selected verify that the relevant Update check-box is selected. Otherwise, verify that the relevant Update check-box is de-selected.
INFORMATION
For information on the information provided by specific counters refer to the Real-Time Performance Counters section in the applicable Device Driver Manual.
To open the Real Time Performance Viewer:
AlvariSTAR User Manual 55
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerReal-Time Performance ViewerChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Real-Time Performance Viewer
The RT Performance viewer include two sections: the counter group selection panel on the left side and
the graph area.
In the counters group selection panel select the counters group to be monitored. If necessary, use the
hide/expose (+/-) sign to the left of a counters group with sub-groups to hide/expose all relevant groups.
To minimize the counters group selection panel (and increase the size of the graph area), click on the
left-pointing red arrow located on the upper right corner of the panel. To maximize it again to its’
original size, click on the right-pointing red arrow that is now located at the left side of the screen.
Select one or several counters groups (to select multiple groups you may use the traditional Ctrl-click and
Shift-click selection/de-selection methods) to view the real-time multiple line graph(s) for all counters
belonging to each of the selected group(s).
Figure 2-14: RT Performance
Figure 2-15: Counters Group Selection Panel
AlvariSTAR User Manual 56
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerReal-Time Performance ViewerChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Real-Time Performance Viewer
The graph for an accumulating counter displays the average rate per second of the relevant value during
the interval from last polling time, defined as: (Current Value-Previous Value)/Polling Interval.
For gauge counters (marked with a * sign before the counter’s name), the absolute value reported at the
polling time is displayed.
Values range of the value (Y) axis is adapted automatically according to actual values of selected graph
counters. Time (X) axis is updated continuously.
Click on the Expand action link of a counters group graph to maximize its displayed area. In expanded
view mode, click on the Restore action link to restore the displayed graph area to its default size.
Click on the Configure action link to view the following configuration options:
Polling (s): Enables configuring the polling rate, in seconds. The default is 5 seconds. Each polling
point is indicated on the line graphs.
Duration: Enables configuring the maximum period of time (X axis value) to be displayed. The
right-most point of a line graph is the last polled value. The left-most point is the starting point, up to
a maximum defined by the duration parameter (older values will be shifted “outside”). The default is
6 hours.
Hide legend check box: The default is selected (hide legends). De-select to display legends and
associated graph colours. When legends are displayed, a check-box next to each legend enables
selecting/de-selecting the relevant counter (by default all counters in the relevant group are selected).
Only selected counters will be displayed in the graph area.
To expand/restore the displayed graph:
To configure the displayed graph:
Figure 2-16: Select equipment
AlvariSTAR User Manual 57
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerReal-Time Performance ViewerChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Real-Time Performance Viewer
Reset counters: Click on the button to reset relevant counters.
Click Back to apply changes and exit configuration mode.
Place the mouse over a polling time indication to view momentary values of relevant counters.
Right click on a selected point and drag left/right and/or up/down to shift the displayed graphs in the
time (X-axis) and/or value (Y-axis) domain(s).
Note that after shifting the displayed graphs the time and value axis are “frozen”.
Left-click and drag down and to the right or right-down (starting point should be the upper left corner
of the target area). to draw a rectangle defining the target area. The entire display area will be allocated
to the defined target area.
After shift and/or zoom-in operations, left-click anywhere and drag up and to the right or to the left to
restore the displayed graphs to the original (default) display mode.
Figure 2-17: Counters Legends and Selection Section
To view counters’ values for a specific polling time:
To shift the displayed line graphs:
To zoom-in on a selected time/value range:
To restore the display to its default display mode:
AlvariSTAR User Manual 58
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerConfiguration History Request and ReportChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Configuration History Request and Report
2.12 Configuration History Request and Report
The Configuration History Request window enables defining the time interval and filtering parameters
for a Configuration History Report detailing the relevant changes in the configuration of a selected
device.
In the Equipment tab, select the relevant device and click on the Configuration History option in the
Actions panel. The Configuration History Request window opens:
In the Interval section, select Start Date and End Date for the report.
Select the Filter SYSTEM Logs to include in the report only changes made by users of the same NMS
system. De-select this option to include also all changes made by the system. These includes changes
initiated by the device itself (as a response to various events), changes made via Telnet/SNMP, and
changes made using other NMS servers. The default is selected (checked).
Select Summarized Report to show in the report only the changes between the requested Start Date
and End Date. For example, if a certain parameter was modified more than once during the specified
interval, only a single change entry will be provided, indicating the last relevant change (the value in
Changed From will be the value at Start Date). If following any series of changes the status of a certain
parameter at End Date is the same as in Start Date, no change will be indicated in the report. De-select
INFORMATION
The Configuration History feature is applicable only for devices that support this feature (4Motion and COMPACT).
To open the Configuration History Request window:
Figure 2-18: The Configuration History Request
AlvariSTAR User Manual 59
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerConfiguration History Request and ReportChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Configuration History Request and Report
the Summarized Report option to include in the report all changes history. The default is de-selected
(unchecked).
Click on the OK button to generate the requested report.
The Configuration History Report title includes identification details:
BTS Name
BTS Number
Address (IP address used for management)
Interval of the report (From-To)
For each change included in the report the following details are provided:
Figure 2-19: The Configuration History Report
Parameter Description
Group The type of entity that was changed.
Instance Identification of the specific entity that was changed.
Parameter The specific parameter that was changed (applicable only for MOD operation).
Operation Type of change: ADD, DEL (Delete), MOD (Modify).
Changed From The value of the parameter before the change (applicable only for MOD operation). In a Summarized Report this is the value at the Start Date of the report.
Changed To The value of the parameter after the change (applicable only for MOD operation). In a Summarized Report this is the value after the last change to the parameter during the report’s interval.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 60
Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerThe Equipment Selector WindowChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager The Equipment Selector Window
Double-click on an entry to open a Record Data window providing all configuration details of the
relevant Group’s Instance.
You can use the Filter option to view only changes associated with a specific group (entity type). Type a
string of characters to filter the list on the fly. Only Groups that include the entered string will be
displayed.
To export the report as a CSV file, click on the Export button to open the Export dialog box, allowing
you to define file name and location.
2.13 The Equipment Selector Window
The Equipment Selector window is opened whenever there is a need to select equipment (typically for
adding equipment to a task). Only relevant devices are included in the displayed list. You may use the
Find Equipment panel to search for devices that meet specific criteria.
Select a single or multiple devices (you can use the traditional Ctrl-click and Shift-click
selection/de-selection methods) and click Apply to add the selected device(s) to the relevant equipment
list.
Changed By The user that made the change. In a Summarized Report this is the user that made the last change to the relevant parameter.
Changed At Time and date of the change. In a Summarized Report this is the time and date of the last change to the relevant parameter.
Configuration Section Click the Go To Section cut-through link to open a new BTS tab for the relevant device. The relevant configuration page (or the general Site/BTS page if there is no specific configuration page for the relevant Group) will be opened automatically.
Figure 2-20: Equipment Selector
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 61
Chapter 3 - The Active Events Manager
In This Chapter:
Introduction to the Active Events Manager
Active Events Main Area
Event Details
Active Events Actions Panel
Find Events Panel
Chapter 3 - The Active Events ManagerIntroduction to the Active Events ManagerChapter 3 - The Active Events Manager Introduction to the Active Events Manager
3.1 Introduction to the Active Events Manager
The Active Events Manager displays details of currently active events received by the management
system from devices that can be managed by the specific user, enabling management and diagnosis of
events.
Select the Active Events tab header in the tabs ribbon. The Active Events Manager screen is displayed.
3.2 Active Events Main Area
This section includes:
Active Events Table
Event Types
Event Severity
Toggle Counter
3.2.1 Active Events Table
To open the Active Events Manager:
INFORMATION The Active Events tab header includes a red oval with the number of active events with critical severity. If there are no critical severity events the red oval will not be displayed. The relevant list of active events includes all active events received from devices that can be managed by the specific user and is not affected by any settings in the Find panel.
Figure 3-1: The Active Events Table
AlvariSTAR User Manual 63
Chapter 3 - The Active Events ManagerActive Events Main AreaChapter 3 - The Active Events Manager Active Events Main Area
The Active Events Main Area comprises a table that by default includes all the currently active events that
were received from devices that can be managed by the specific user. The display is updated whenever
an alarm is received or cleared.
To freeze the display such that the display of incoming alarms is suppressed, click on the Freeze button
located above the table in the top right corner of the Main Area. When in Freeze mode, the button label
changes to Unfreeze, enabling to return to the default state of displaying incoming alarms on the fly.
By default, only events that are categorized as alarms are displayed. However, in the event template of
an event belonging to another event category (severity Other) the event may be defined as Requires
Acknowledge (see “Behavior Tab” on page 137). Such events will also be included in Active Events. Such
an event cannot be cleared (either manually or automatically) and it will be removed from the Active
Events table only after acknowledging it.
Cleared events are removed from the Active Events display and can only be viewed in the Event History
Manager (see “Event History Manager” on page 105). The cleared events that are not displayed include:
Manually cleared alarms
Alarms cleared by the automatic correlation rules
Alarms associated to a device that can no longer be managed by the system
Multiple occurrences of the same alarm (only one instance is visible in Active Events. For more details
see.“Toggle Counter” on page 67).
Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.
By default, the information displayed for each active event includes:
Parameter Description
Event Severity Icon An event icon whose color is according to event severity:
Critical: Red
Major: Orange
Minor: Yellow
Warning: Blue
Indeterminate: Purple
Cleared: Green (shown for a short time only)
Other: Grey (applicable only for non-alarm events defined in the template with the Requires Acknowledge option selected).
The Icon column has a fixed width and it cannot be moved or deleted.
Severity The severity of the event. Refer to “Event Severity” on page 66.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 64
Chapter 3 - The Active Events ManagerActive Events Main AreaChapter 3 - The Active Events Manager Active Events Main Area
Additional optional information columns (not included in the default view) are:
3.2.2 Event Types
The possible Event Types for Alarms are:
Other: Used to report an alarm event not covered by any of the following alarm event types.
Communication Alarm: Used to report when the object detects a communications error.
Quality Of Service Alarm: Used to report a failure in the quality of service of the managed object.
Processing Error Alarm: Used to report processing failure in a managed object.
Equipment Alarm: Used to report a failure in the equipment.
Environmental Alarm: used to report a problem in the environment.
Integrity Violation: Used to report that a potential interruption in information flow has occurred such
that information may have been illegally modified, inserted or deleted.
Event Name The name of the event. If the name is blank when received by the application, the event takes the name of the event template used for processing the event (see “Event Templates Manager” on page 128).
Receive Time The time and date of receiving the event.
Event Time The time and date of the event occurrence.
IP Address The IP address of the equipment reporting this event.
Equipment Type The type of equipment reporting this event.
Equipment The name of the equipment reporting this event, accompanied by the BTS Number.
Managed Object The managed object (MO) physical or logical component in the equipment associated with the event.
Alias The name of the physical or logical component/sub-component in the equipment associated with the event.
Event Type The classification type of the event. Available event types vary according to the event category. For more details see “Event Types” on page 65.
Parameter Description
Acked By The user who acknowledged the event (if applicable).
Ack Time The date and time the event was acknowledged (if applicable).
Last Update Time The date and time at which the last update of the event was received.
Location The location assigned to the equipment reporting the event (if any).
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 65
Chapter 3 - The Active Events ManagerActive Events Main AreaChapter 3 - The Active Events Manager Active Events Main Area
Operational Violation: Used to report that the provision of the requested service was not possible due
to the unavailability, malfunction or incorrect invocation of the service.
Physical Violation: Used to report that a physical resource has been violated in a way that indicates a
potential security attack.
Security Service Or Mechanism Violation: Used to report that a security attack has been detected by a
security service or mechanism.
Time Domain Violation: used to report that an event has occurred at an unexpected or prohibited
time.
For other event categories (non-alarm events defined in the template with the Requires Acknowledge
option selected) the possible Event Types are:
3.2.3 Event Severity
The management system is delivered with a set of default event severity definitions, each with its own
default color.
The default severity definitions for alarm events are:
Event Category Event Type
State Change State Or Status Change
System Event System Event
Software Download
Backup Configuration File
Maintenance
Telnet Session
Config Change Config Change
Entity Added
Entity Changed
Entity Removed
Parameter Description
Critical (red) A service-halting condition occurs, requiring immediate corrective action. The equipment is completely out of service and you must restore its capability.
Major (orange) A service-affecting condition has developed and corrective action is required. There is severe degradation in the equipment’s capability and you must restore its full capability.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 66
Chapter 3 - The Active Events ManagerActive Events Main AreaChapter 3 - The Active Events Manager Active Events Main Area
For non-alarm events (applicable only for events defined in the template with the Requires Acknowledge
option selected) the severity is Other.
The Severity of events received from managed devices is according to the severity level defined in the
device for each specific event.
3.2.4 Toggle Counter
Toggle Events are a group of events that are associated to the same Network Element, have the same
attributes but not the same event time and are raised and cleared repeatedly before the management
system is able to clear and remove the event from the Active Events list.
The attributes used for matching a Toggle Event are:
equipmentId
eventOID
eventCategory
moType
moInstance
managedObject
eventType
probableCause
In order to avoid flooding the Active Events table with toggling events, these events will be suppressed
and an attribute named Toggle Counter that cumulates the number of toggle occurrences, is used in the
Active Events table. If a Toggle Event already exists in the Active Events table, only an update will be
performed, incrementing the Toggle Counter attribute and changing the event severity and timestamp
Minor (yellow) A non-service-affecting fault condition exists and corrective action should be taken in order to prevent a more serious fault. The detected event condition is not currently degrading the capacity of the equipment.
Warning (blue) A potential or impending service-affecting fault could occur, and no significant effects have yet been felt. Action should be taken to further diagnose and correct the problem to prevent it from becoming a more serious service-affecting fault. The detected event condition does not currently pose a problem, but may degrade the capacity of the equipment if you do not take corrective action.
Indeterminate (purple) Indicates an event for which the perceived severity is uncertain, due to any cause.
Cleared (green) The problem has been corrected.
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 67
Chapter 3 - The Active Events ManagerEvent DetailsChapter 3 - The Active Events Manager Event Details
to the severity and timestamp of the last Toggle Event. The Toggle Counter is displayed in parenthesis
next to the event’s Severity in the Active Events table.
All instances of the toggling events can be found on the Event History in case required for further
analysis.
3.3 Event Details
The Event Details section is applicable only for s single selected event and it includes the following tabs:
Events Details General Tab
Events Details Status Tab
Events Details Parameters Tab
Events Details Other Info Tab
Events Details Notes Tab
3.3.1 Events Details General Tab
The General tab displays the following details for the selected event:
Figure 3-2: Event Details General Tab
Parameter Description
Equipment Name The name of the equipment.
Equipment Type The type of equipment.
Managed Object The managed object (MO) physical or logical component in the equipment associated with the event.
Alias The name of the physical or logical component/sub-component in the equipment associated with the event.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 68
Chapter 3 - The Active Events ManagerEvent DetailsChapter 3 - The Active Events Manager Event Details
3.3.2 Events Details Status Tab
The Status tab displays the following details for the selected event:
Location Name The location assigned to the equipment.
Event Category The category classification of the event. The event categories are: Alarm, State Change, System Event, Config Change. For Active Events only Alarm category is applicable.
Event Type The classification type of the event. Event types vary according to the event category. For details refer to “Event Types” on page 65.
Event Name The name of the event. If the name is blank when received by the application, the event takes the name of the event template used for processing.
Event Description A general description of the event.
Event Severity The severity of the event.
Object Severity The event severity of the managed object associated with the event.
Figure 3-3: Event Details Status Tab
Parameter Description
Last Update Time The date and time at which the last update of the event was received.
Receive Time The date and time at which the event was received.
Event Time The date and time at which the event actually occurred.
Ack Time The date and time at which event was acknowledged (if applicable).
Acked By The user who acknowledged the event (if applicable).
Clear Time The date and time that the event was cleared (if applicable).
Cleared By The user who cleared the event (if applicable).
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 69
Chapter 3 - The Active Events ManagerEvent DetailsChapter 3 - The Active Events Manager Event Details
3.3.3 Events Details Parameters Tab
The Parameters tab displays the following details for the selected event:
3.3.4 Events Details Other Info Tab
The Other Info tab displays the following details for the selected event:
Figure 3-4: Event Details Parameters Tab
Parameter Description
Event Severity The severity of the event.
Object Severity The severity of the object associated with the event.
Probable Cause The probable cause of the event.
Specific Problem The specific problem that caused the event.
Cleared By The user who cleared the event (if applicable).
Clear Time The date and time at which the event was cleared (if applicable).
Clear Cause The reason the event was cleared (if applicable).
Figure 3-5: Event Details Other Info Tab
AlvariSTAR User Manual 70
Chapter 3 - The Active Events ManagerEvent DetailsChapter 3 - The Active Events Manager Event Details
In addition, a table that contains all trap attributes together their OID and Value is displayed at the
bottom.
3.3.5 Events Details Notes Tab
The Notes tab displays the following details for the selected event
Parameter Description
Protocol The protocol used for the event. The current version supports SNMP only.
Source IP Address The IP address of the equipment that sent the event.
SNMP Version The number of SNMP version used by the equipment.
Generic Trap The generic trap code. It indicates an enterprise specific trap. Possible values: 0,1,2,3,4,6
Specific Trap The specific trap code as defined in the MIB, used only if Generic trap is 6.
Enterprise OID The SNMP trap Object Identification number.
System Up Time Up time of the equipment.
Figure 3-6: Event Details Notes Tab
Parameter Description
Event Advisor Displays a text description of the event and sometimes proposes a remedy. For example, “The device has received an improperly authorized protocol message. The message has been discarded.” The default message displayed in the Advisor page comes from the trap’s MIB, but the message can be edited in the Event Template Editor Behavior page (see “Behavior Tab” on page 137). The Advisor message is the default message for any e-mails sent about the event.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 71
Chapter 3 - The Active Events ManagerActive Events Actions PanelChapter 3 - The Active Events Manager Active Events Actions Panel
3.4 Active Events Actions Panel
The Active Events Actions panel includes the following sections:
Operations
View
3.4.1 Operations
The Operations section includes the following options
Proposed Repair Actions The proposed remedy for the event. The remedy comes from the trap’s MIB.
General Notes Additional information about the specific event that is optionally defined using the Event Notes action.
Option Action
Acknowledge Acknowledges the selected event(s). The current date and time appear in the Ack Time field, and the name of the currently logged-on user appears in the Ack By field. For a single selected event, applicable only for an unacknowledged event. For multiple selected events, always applicable: only previously unacknowledged events will be acknowledged.
Non-alarm events defined in the template with the Requires Acknowledge option selected will be removed from the table only after acknowledgement.
Unacknowledge Unacknowledges previously acknowledged selected event(s), and clears the entries in the Ack By and Ack Time fields.
For a single selected event, applicable only for an acknowledged event. For multiple selected events, always applicable: only previously unacknowledged events will be acknowledged. Only events that were previously acknowledged by the current user can be unacknowledged. Events acknowledged by other users cannot be unacknowledged.
Clear Clears selected event(s). The cleared event(s) will be removed from the Active Events table and will be identified as cleared in Events History. Cleared By and Clear Time fields for applicable event(s) in Event History will be updated accordingly.
Not applicable for non-alarm events defined in the template with the Requires Acknowledge option selected. These events will be removed from the table only after acknowledgement.
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 72
Chapter 3 - The Active Events ManagerFind Events PanelChapter 3 - The Active Events Manager Find Events Panel
3.4.2 View
The View section includes the following options:
3.5 Find Events Panel
This section includes:
Regular Search/Filter View
The Hierarchy View
Configure Opens a BTS configuration manager for the relevant device, enabling full configuration management capabilities. The name of the newly opened tab is BTS <BTS Number>. Not available if two or more events are selected. The BTS configuration manager will not be opened if the Operational State of the relevant device is Disabled.
Cut Through Opens a Telnet session to the relevant device in a separate window. Not available if two or more events are selected. A Telnet session will not be opened if the Operational State of the relevant device is Disabled.
Export Exports the selected event(s) and creates a Comma Separated Value (CSV) file. All details of selected event(s) are exported, including columns that are currently hidden.
Click to open the Export Events window, browse to the desired location on the client file-system, enter the File Name, and click Export to export the event(s).
Event Notes Click to open the Event Notes window, enabling to provide additional information about the specific event, such as steps already taken to correct the problem. The note is stored with the event and is displayed in the Event Details Notes tab.
Option Action
Open Location Available only for a single selected event. Opens the logical map for the location of the relevant device (provided it has an assigned location). For details refer to “The Logical Location Map” on page 100.
Print Preview Displays a preview of the current page before printing. See details in Print below.
Print Prints the entire current page, including columns that are currently hidden.
Option Action
AlvariSTAR User Manual 73
Chapter 3 - The Active Events ManagerFind Events PanelChapter 3 - The Active Events Manager Find Events Panel
3.5.1 Regular Search/Filter View
For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.
The simple Search option is performed on Equipment column (including BTS Number).
Pre-defined Filters include:
Severity: Available options include all possible relevant severities. Each severity will be accompanied by
(X/Y), where X is the number of currently displayed (filtered using all possible search/filter options)
events with the relevant severity, and Y is the current total number of events with the relevant severity
in the database. Multiple selection of different Severities is supported.
Acknowledged: Enabling to display only acknowledged events (see Acknowledge action above).
Equipment Type: Available options include all possible equipment (NE) types that are supported by the
currently installed Device Drivers, plus the NMS equipment. Multiple selection is supported. Multiple
selection of different Equipment Types is supported.
Managed Object Type: Available option include all MO Types relevant to the selected Equipment
Type(s). Multiple selection of different Managed Object Types is supported.
Advanced Filters include the following criteria:
Equipment
IP Address
Event Type
3.5.2 The Hierarchy View
The Active Events Manager allows also filtering based on equipment locations using the location-based
hierarchy view.
To switch to location-based hierarchy view, click on the Hierarchy View icon ( ) on the top of the
panel. To switch back to the regular Search/Filter view, click on the regular Search/View icon ( ).
The hierarchy view displays the location-based hierarchy of the network, as defined in the Locations
Manager (see “The Locations Manager” on page 95).
AlvariSTAR User Manual 74
Chapter 3 - The Active Events ManagerFind Events PanelChapter 3 - The Active Events Manager Find Events Panel
Use the hide/expose sign to the left of each location with sub-locations to hide/expose all relevant
sub-locations.
You can use the free-text Find text box together with the Next and Previous buttons to find locations
that include the search string anywhere in their name.
Use the check-boxes to select required locations/sub-locations. Only events associated with devices
whose location matches any of the selected locations will be displayed in the Main Area.
By default all events generated by devices without an assigned location are also displayed. De-select the
Show Unallocated check-box to remove the events generated by these devices from the displayed list.
Figure 3-7: Find Events Hierarchy View
AlvariSTAR User Manual 75
Chapter 4 - Configuration Operations
In This Chapter:
“The Offline Project Configuration Manager” on page 77
“The Offline Building Blocks Manager” on page 82
“The Configuration Templates Manager” on page 84
“The GPS Chains Manager” on page 89
“The Locations Manager” on page 95
Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Offline Project Configuration ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Offline Project Configuration Manager
4.1 The Offline Project Configuration Manager
This section includes:
Introduction to the Offline Project Configuration Manager
Offline Project Configuration Main Area
Offline Project Configuration Actions Panel
Find Project Panel
The Create Project Window
4.1.1 Introduction to the Offline Project Configuration Manager
Operators are faced with the need for quick and efficient deployment of a large number of new sites
once the operation goes into its commercial phase. As many of the installations share most of the
configuration parameters, all the common configuration parameters can be defined once and then
copied to all sites. However, certain configuration parameters must be configured per site.
The Configuration Tool is a wizard that supports easy and simple preparation of common parameters
files and automatic generation of a draft for per-site unique parameters file that can be used for fast
creation of per-site configuration files.
The Offline Project Configuration Manager enables management of common parameters files (Projects),
including preparation of new Projects and Draft Unique Parameters Files using the Configuration Tool,
editing a previously prepared Project, and initiating the Mass Configuration Wizard for generation of
per-site configuration files based on a previously prepared Project and a per-site Unique Parameters File.
Select Configuration Operation>Offline Project Configuration from the Main Menu. The Offline Project
Configuration tab is added to the tabs ribbon and the Offline Project Configuration Manager screen is
displayed.
INFORMATIONThe Offline Project Configuration Manager is available only if the installed Device Drivers include one or more Device Driver(s) for device families that support this feature. In the current release this includes only COMPACT.
To open the Offline Data Manager:
AlvariSTAR User Manual 77
Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Offline Project Configuration ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Offline Project Configuration Manager
4.1.2 Offline Project Configuration Main Area
The Offline Project Configuration grid view comprises a table that includes all the offline projects that
exist in the database of the management system.
Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.
By default, the read-only information displayed for each offline project include:
4.1.3 Offline Project Configuration Actions Panel
The Offline Project Configuration Actions panel includes the following options:
Figure 4-1: Offline Project Configuration Table
Parameter Description
Name The name of the Project. The default name is Project_Offline_<YYYYMMDDHHMM> indicating the creation date and time of the Project file.
Equipment Type The type of equipment for which the Project file was prepared.
Release Number The applicable release number. A Project prepared for a certain combination of Equipment Type/Release Number can be used for preparing configuration files only for matching network elements (same Equipment Type and formal release number).
Owner The name of the NMS user that prepared the Project file.
Creation Date Date and time of Project file’s creation.
Type The Type of the Project File;
Multiple Site: A Project prepared using the Multiple Configuration Wizard supporting preparation of configuration files for multiple sites simultaneously.
Single Site: A Project prepared using the Single Site Configuration Wizard supporting preparation of a configuration file for a single site.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 78
Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Offline Project Configuration ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Offline Project Configuration Manager
4.1.4 Find Project Panel
For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.
The simple Search option is not available for projects.
Pre-defined Filters include:
Equipment Type: Available options include equipment types that are actually available in the Projects
database. Each Equipment Type will be accompanied by the current number of instances in the
templates list.
Option Action
New Opens the Create Project window enabling to specify the Equipment Type, Release Number and Wizard type for creating a new Project file. For details see “The Create Project Window” on page 80.
Edit Opens the Configuration Tool used for preparing the selected Project, enabling to edit it. For details refer to the Offline Configuration Tool Wizard section in the relevant Device Driver manual.
Delete Deletes the selected Project file(s) from the database.
Mass Configuration Available only for a single Multiple Site Project. Opens the Mass Configuration Wizard for creating Offline Configuration Files (see “Using the Mass Configuration Wizard” on page 181) based on the selected Project.
Export Draft Unique File Available only for a single Multiple Site Project. Exports the applicable Draft Unique File (generated during Project creation) to a selected location. Click to open the Save window, browse to the required location on the client file-system, and click Save. The default name of the file is Project_Offline_<creation_date>_Unique.xls. You may define a different File Name before clicking Save.
Generate Offline Config File
Available only for a single Single Site Project. Generates an offline configuration file and saves it in the Data Files Manager. The default name is YYYYMMDDHHMM (date and time at which the file was added to the Data Files database). In the Data Files Manager you may use the Restore task for loading offline configuration file(s) to the target device(s).
NOTE: The offline configuration file is automatically generated and added to the Data Files Manager upon successful completion of the project. To avoid duplicate files with different names (as the name is based on the time at which the file is added to the database), this option should be used only if the original file was accidentally deleted from the database.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 79
Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Offline Project Configuration ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Offline Project Configuration Manager
Release Number: Available options include only release number that are actually available in the
Projects database. Each Release Number will be accompanied by the current number of instances in
the database.
Advanced Filters include the following criteria:
Type
Name
Owner
Creation Date
4.1.5 The Create Project Window
To open the Create Project window select the New option in the Offline Project Configuration manager:
The Create Project window includes the following parameters:
Figure 4-2: The Create Project Window
Parameter Description
Equipment Type The type of equipment for which the Project will be prepared.
Release Number The applicable release number. A Project prepared for a certain combination of Equipment Type/Release Number can be used for preparing configuration files only for matching network elements (same equipment type and formal release number).
Wizard The type of wizard to be used for preparing the Project file:
Multiple Configuration Tool: Supporting future preparation of configuration files for multiple devices simultaneously, using an Excel file with per-site unique parameters.
Single Site Configuration Tool: Supporting preparation of a configuration file for a single device, including all mandatory unique parameters.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 80
Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Offline Project Configuration ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Offline Project Configuration Manager
Click OK to start the Configuration Tool wizard. For details refer to the Offline Configuration Tool
Wizard section in the relevant Device Driver manual.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 81
Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Offline Building Blocks ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Offline Building Blocks Manager
4.2 The Offline Building Blocks Manager
This section includes:
Introduction to the Offline Building Blocks Manager
Offline Building Blocks Main Area
Offline Building Blocks Actions Panel
Find Building Block Panel
4.2.1 Introduction to the Offline Building Blocks Manager
The Building Block view enables viewing/deleting previously saved Offline Building Blocks. A Building
Block includes a certain group of parameters with specific values that was previously saved in the
database during preparation or editing of an Offline Project. These Building Blocks may be re-used when
preparing a new Project or when editing an existing one. For more details refer to the section on Using
the Offline Configuration Tool Wizard in the relevant Device Driver Manual.
Select Configuration Operation>Offline Building Blocks from the Main Menu. The Offline Building Blocks
tab is added to the tabs ribbon and the Offline Building Blocks Manager screen is displayed.
4.2.2 Offline Building Blocks Main Area
INFORMATIONThe Offline Building Blocks Manager is available only if the installed Device Drivers include one or more Device Driver(s) for device families that support the Offline Project Configurations feature. In the current release this includes only COMPACT.
To open the Offline Building Blocks Manager:
Figure 4-3: Offline Building Blocks Table
AlvariSTAR User Manual 82
Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Offline Building Blocks ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Offline Building Blocks Manager
The Offline Building Blocks grid view comprises a table that includes all the offline building block that
exist in the database of the management system.
Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.
By default, the read-only information displayed for each offline building block include:
4.2.3 Offline Building Blocks Actions Panel
The Offline Building Blocks Actions panel includes the following options:
4.2.4 Find Building Block Panel
For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.
The simple Search option is not available for building blocks.
Pre-defined Filters include:
Equipment Type: Available options include equipment types that are actually available in the Offline
Building Blocks database. Each Equipment Type will be accompanied by the current number of
instances in the templates list.
Release Number: Available options include only release number that are actually available in the
Offline Building Blocks database. Each Release Number will be accompanied by the current number of
instances in the database.
Advanced Filters include the Type and Name criteria.
Parameter Description
Name The name of the Building Block as defined when it was saved (see Using the Offline Configuration Tool Wizard in the relevant Device Driver Manual).
Equipment Type The type of relevant equipment.
Type The Building Block Type (according to the applicable step of the wizard).
Release Number The relevant formal release number.
Option Action
Delete Deletes the selected Building Block(s) from the database.
View Block Opens a read-only view of the Building Block.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 83
Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Configuration Templates ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Configuration Templates Manager
4.3 The Configuration Templates Manager
This section includes:
Introduction to the Configuration Templates Manager
Configuration Templates Main Area
Configuration Templates Actions Panel
Find Templates Panel
The Template Editor
The Template Selector Window
4.3.1 Introduction to the Configuration Templates Manager
The Configuration Templates Manager enables managing equipment configuration templates that can
be used for modifying configuration of selected devices using the template-based Multiple
Configuration task (see “Multiple Configuration Task” on page 225).
For details on configuring specific templates refer to the Configuring Templates section in the relevant
Device Driver Manual.
Select Configuration Operations > Configuration Templates from the Main Menu. The Configuration
Templates tab is added to the tabs ribbon and the Configuration Templates Manager is displayed.
To open the Configuration Templates Manager
Figure 4-4: The Configuration Template Manager
AlvariSTAR User Manual 84
Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Configuration Templates ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Configuration Templates Manager
4.3.2 Configuration Templates Main Area
The Configuration Templates grid view comprises a table that includes all the configuration templates
that exist in the database of the management system.
Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.
By default, the read-only information displayed for each configuration template includes:
:
Depending on the installed Device Driver(s), the system may be supplied with several default templates
for some typical deployment scenarios of the relevant equipment. The template’s name provide the main
properties of the relevant deployment scenario (for details refer to the Configuring Templates section in
the relevant Device Driver Manual). Default templates cannot be modified or deleted. To create a
different template based on an existing default template, select the required source template and use
the Copy action.
4.3.3 Configuration Templates Actions Panel
The Configuration Templates Actions panel includes the following options:
Figure 4-5: The Configuration Templates Table
Parameter Description
Name The name of the template
Equipment Type The type of equipment for which the template is prepared.
MO Type The type of Managed Object for which the template is applicable.
Release Number The Release Number for which the template is applicable.
Owner The user that created the template.
Option Action
New Adds a new template object to the database. Click to open the Template Editor, allowing to define general properties of the template to be created. For more details, see “The Template Editor” on page 87.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 85
Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Configuration Templates ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Configuration Templates Manager
4.3.4 Find Templates Panel
For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.
The simple Search option is not available for templates.
Pre-defined Filters include:
Equipment Type: Available options include only equipment types that are actually available in the
configuration templates database. Each Equipment Type will be accompanied by the current number
of instances in the database.
Edit Not available if two or more templates are selected. Not available for default templates. Opens the Template Editor for the selected template, allowing to edit the Name and Description of the template. All other properties of an existing template cannot be modified. For more details, see “The Template Editor” on page 87.
Copy Not available if two or more templates are selected. Opens the Template Editor for a new template, that is identical to the selected “source” template, with the default name of “Copy of <source template name>. You can edit only the Name and Description of the new template. All other properties of the new template cannot be modified. For more details, see “The Template Editor” on page 87.
Configure Not available if two or more templates are selected. Opens the Template Configuration Editor for the selected template. For more details refer to the Configuring Templates section in the relevant Device Driver Manual.
Apply Not available if two or more templates are selected. Opens the Multiple Configuration Task editor, allowing to initiate a Multiple Configuration task using the selected template. For more details refer to “Multiple Configuration Task” on page 225.
Delete Not available for default templates. Deletes the selected template(s) from the database. The application prompts you for confirmation.
Import Imports a template XML file from the client file-system. Click to open the Import window, browse to the location on the client file-system where the file is stored, select the file and click Import. The Template Editor will open, allowing you to modify the Name and Description of the imported file.
Export Not available if two or more templates are selected. Exports the selected template XML file to the client file-system. Click to open the Export Equipment Template window, browse to the desired location on the client file-system, if necessary change the name to be assigned to the template file in the client file-system, and click Export to export the template.
Option Action
AlvariSTAR User Manual 86
Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Configuration Templates ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Configuration Templates Manager
MO Type: Available options include only MO types that are actually available in the configuration
templates database. Each MO Type will be accompanied by the current number of instances in the
database.
Advanced Filters include the following criteria:
Name
Release Number
Owner
4.3.5 The Template Editor
The Template editor enables creating a new template, editing an existing template (excluding default
templates) and creating a new template based on a copy of an existing one.
The Template Editor comprises the following fields:
Figure 4-6: The Template Editor
Parameter Description
Name The name of the template. A string of 1 to 128 characters.
Description An optional free text field providing a general description of the task. A string of 0 to 250 characters.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 87
Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Configuration Templates ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Configuration Templates Manager
4.3.6 The Template Selector Window
The Template Selector window is opened whenever there is a need to select a template for a multiple
configuration task.
When opened from the Equipment Manager (using the Multiple Configuration option), only templates
with Equipment Type matching the type of selected device(s) will be displayed.
You may use the Find Template panel to search for template(s) that meet specific criteria.
Select a single template and click Apply to open/return to the Multiple Configuration Task window
(see.“Multiple Configuration Task” on page 225).
Equipment Type The type of equipment for which the template is prepared. Can be configured only for a new template. Available types depend on the installed Device Driver(s). For more details refer to the Configuring Templates section in the relevant Device Driver Manual.
Release Number The Release Number for which the template is applicable. Can be configured only for a new template. Available Release Numbers depend on the selected Equipment Type. For more details refer to the Configuring Templates section in the relevant Device Driver Manual.
MO Type The type of Managed Object for which the template is applicable. Can be configured only for a new template. Available MO Types depend on the selected Equipment Type and Release Number. For more details refer to the Configuring Templates section in the relevant Device Driver Manual.
Owner Read-only. The user that created the template.
Creation Date Read-only. The date and time of template’s creation.
Figure 4-7: Template Selector
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 88
Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe GPS Chains ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The GPS Chains Manager
4.4 The GPS Chains Manager
This section includes:
Introduction to the GPS Chains Manager
GPS Chains Main Area
GPS Chains Details Panel
GPS Chains Actions Panel
Find GPS Chain Panel
The GPS Chain Editor
4.4.1 Introduction to the GPS Chains Manager
GPS chaining enables several collocated using a single clock synchronization source. Each chain should
include a single Master unit (connected to a GPS receiver if available) and one or more slave units. A unit
configured as Slave 1 should be connected to the Master, Slave 2 to Slave 1, and so on.
The GPS Chains Manager provides functionality and access to windows that let you manage the GPS
chains and GPS functionality of specific devices in your network.
Select Configuration Operation>GPS Chains from the Main Menu. The GPS Chains tab is added to the
tabs ribbon and the GPS Chains Manager screen is displayed.
The GPS Chains Manager is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility.
INFORMATIONThe GPS Chains Manager is available only if the installed Device Drivers include one or more Device Driver(s) for device families that support the GPS chaining feature. In the current release this includes only Extreme.
To open the GPS Chains Manager:
AlvariSTAR User Manual 89
Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe GPS Chains ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The GPS Chains Manager
4.4.2 GPS Chains Main Area
The GPS Chains grid view comprises a table that includes all the GPS chains that exist in the database of
the management system.
Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.
By default, the read-only information displayed for each chain include:
:
Figure 4-8: GPS Chains Table
Parameter Description
Location The location assigned to the Master devices.
Chain Number The unique identifier of the chain.
Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout
Upon losing the 1PPS clock from the GPS, or if the received clock is not considered accurate enough because the number of received satellites dropped below the minimum (two satellites), the local 1PPS clock will be generated using the available 10 MHz clock. After a certain time (defined by the Hold Over Passed Timeout parameters described below), it is assumed that due to clock drifts there might be interferences among sectors belonging to the BTS and sectors belonging to neighboring BTSs. If the Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout parameter is set to Enable, the BTS will stop transmitting after this timeout (unless the unit has exited Hold Over mode following proper reception of at least four satellites), to prevent interferences to the sectors belonging to other BTSs. If it is set to Disable, transmissions will continue indefinitely, at the expense of potential interferences to sectors belonging to other BTSs.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 90
Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe GPS Chains ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The GPS Chains Manager
4.4.3 GPS Chains Details Panel
For a single selected chain, the Details section provide the following details for each device belonging to
the chain:
:
For multiple selected chains no details are displayed.
Hold Over Passed Timeout (min)
This parameter defines the Hold Over time-out, after which there might be interferences to other sectors. When the Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout is enabled, transmissions will stop after this timeout. When the Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout is disabled, this timeout indicates that there might be interferences to neighboring sectors.
GPS Type The type of GPS being used, as configured in the Master device (Trimble or None).
Local clock difference from UTC
This is the offset of the local time from UTC (Coordinated Universal Time).
Number of Master The number of devices configured as Masters. This number should be 1: Any other value will be colored red, indicating a configuration problem that should be corrected.
Figure 4-9: GPS Chains Details
Parameter Description
Name The equipment name. Click on the name of a device to open the Device Configuration manager for the selected device. The name of the newly opened tab is BTS <BTS Number>.
Type The equipment type.
IP Address The management IP address of the equipment.
Clock Mode The current Clock Mode of the equipment (Master, Slave 1, etc.)
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 91
Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe GPS Chains ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The GPS Chains Manager
4.4.4 GPS Chains Actions Panel
The GPS Chains Actions panel includes the following options:
4.4.5 Find GPS Chain Panel
For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.
The simple Search and Pre-Defined Filters option are not available for GPS Chains.
Advanced Filters include the following criteria:
Chain Number
Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout
Hold Over Passed Timeout (min)
GPS Type
Local clock difference from UTC
Number of Masters
4.4.6 The GPS Chain Editor
The GPS Chain Editor enables creating new chains and viewing/modifying all chain parameters that
should be the same in all devices that belong to the same chain.
To configure a new GPS Chain: Click on the New option.
To edit an existing chain: Select the chain and click on the Open option.
Option Action
New Adds a new GPS Chain to the list of chains. The GPS Chain Editor (see “The GPS Chain Editor” on page 92) opens, allowing to co configure the chain parameters.
Open Select a single GPS Chain and click on the Open option open the GPS Chain Editor (see “The GPS Chain Editor” on page 92) for the selected chain.
Delete Deletes the selected chain(s) from the database. You can delete only chains that are not associated to any device.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 92
Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe GPS Chains ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The GPS Chains Manager
tThe GPS Chain Editor includes the following parameters:
Figure 4-10: GPS Chain Editor
Parameter Description
Chain Number Configurable only when defining a new chain. Read-only when updating an existing chain. The Chain Number is used as a unique identifier of a chain. All devices belonging to the same chain should be configured with the same Chain Number.
The range is from 1 to 1500.
Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout
Upon losing the 1PPS clock from the GPS, or if the received clock is not considered accurate enough because the number of received satellites dropped below the minimum (two satellites), the local 1PPS clock will be generated using the available 10 MHz clock. After a certain time (defined by the Hold Over Passed Timeout parameters described below), it is assumed that due to clock drifts there might be interferences among sectors belonging to the BTS and sectors belonging to neighboring BTSs. If the Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout parameter is set to Enable, the BTS will stop transmitting after this timeout (unless the unit has exited Hold Over mode following proper reception of at least four satellites), to prevent interferences to the sectors belonging to other BTSs. If it is set to Disable, transmissions will continue indefinitely, at the expense of potential interferences to sectors belonging to other BTSs.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 93
Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe GPS Chains ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The GPS Chains Manager
The Equipment table enables viewing the details of devices associated to the chain and adding devices
to a chain. The Equipment table will display the following details for each of the displayed device:
Name
Type
IP Address
Current and Configured Clock Mode (Master/Slave 1/Slave 2/Slave 3/Slave 4/Slave 5).
All parameters are read-only except to Configured Clock Mode.
To Add one or several devices to the chain, click on Add. The Select Equipment window (see “The
Equipment Selector Window” on page 61) will open, allowing addition of one or several devices to the
chain. You may click on Revert to cancel the last changes you made (as long as they are not applied
yet).
Hold Over Passed Timeout (min)
This parameter defines the Hold Over timeout, after which there might be interferences to other sectors. When the Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout is enabled, transmissions will stop after this timeout. When the Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout is disabled, this timeout indicates that there might be interferences to neighboring sectors.
The range is from 0 to 2880 (minutes).
Time Zone Offset From UTC
This is the offset of the local time from UTC (Coordinated Universal Time).
The range is from -12:00 up to +13:00 in 30 minutes resolution. The format must be either -XX:YY or +XX:YY where YY is either 00 or 30.
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 94
Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Locations ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Locations Manager
4.5 The Locations Manager
This section includes:
Introduction to the Locations Manager
Locations Main Area
Location Details Panel
Locations Actions Panel
Find Locations Panel
Location Editor
Coordinate Types
The Logical Location Map
The Select location Window
4.5.1 Introduction to the Locations Manager
The Locations Manager enables to specify information regarding the physical location of managed
equipment, to facilitate quick detection of managed objects and help drill down quickly when using
location-based hierarchy view to view specific equipment.
Note that the location assigned to a device by the management system may differ from the location
parameter configured in the device.
Note that a location can have a “Parent” Location, meaning that it belongs to a subset of another
location. For example, if network objects are on the third floor of a facility, you can designate both the
building and the specific floor as locations; the building would be the parent of the floor. You may
define multiple levels for locations. In the current example, the city in which the building is located can
be defined as the parent location of the building, and so on.
To associate either a single device with a location or several devices with the same location, use the Edit
Connectivity action in the Equipment Manager (see “The Network Element Editor” on page 50 and
“The Common attributes Editor” on page 54).
You may also simplify the location assignment process by specifying locations in discovery task’s
definitions (see “Discovery Manager” on page 166 and “Discovery Task” on page 219).
Select Configuration Operations > Locations from the Main Menu. The Locations tab is added to the
tabs ribbon and the Locations Manager is displayed.
To open the Locations Manager:
AlvariSTAR User Manual 95
Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Locations ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Locations Manager
4.5.2 Locations Main Area
Locations are displayed using hierarchy view.
The icon indicates location type: Location ( ) or Building ( ).
Use the hide/expose sign to the left of each location with sub-locations to hide/expose all relevant
sub-locations.
4.5.3 Location Details Panel
The read-only information available in the Location Details section for a single selected location includes:
Location Name
Parent (if applicable)
Figure 4-11: Locations Manager Main Area
Figure 4-12: Location Details
AlvariSTAR User Manual 96
Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Locations ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Locations Manager
Coordinate Type
Coordinates (if defined)
Postal Address (if defined)
Location Details (if defined)
For details on these parameters refer to “Location Editor” on page 97.
For multiple selected locations no details are displayed.
4.5.4 Locations Actions Panel
The Locations Actions panel includes the following options:
4.5.5 Find Locations Panel
You can use the free-text Find text box in the Find Locations panel together with the Next and Previous
buttons to find locations that include the defined search string anywhere in their name.
4.5.6 Location Editor
The Location Editor enables creating a new location or modifying details of an existing location.
Option Action
New Opens the Location editor window, allowing definition of a new location. See Location Editor below for details.
Edit Available only for a single selected location. Opens the Location editor window with the current configuration of the selected location, enabling to modify the configuration. See Location Editor below for details.
Delete Enables to delete the selected location(s) from the database. When deleting a parent location, the application also deletes its associated child locations. If a location or one of its childs is associated with equipment or specified in any discovery task it cannot be deleted.
Add Child Available only for a single selected location. Opens the Location editor window with the name of the selected location displayed in the Parent field, allowing definition of a new child location that will be subordinate to the selected location. See Location Editor below for details.
To create/modify a location:
AlvariSTAR User Manual 97
Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Locations ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Locations Manager
1 In the Actions panel:
» Click on New to create a new location, or
» Select a location and click on Edit to modify the selected location, or
» Select a location and click on click on Add Child to create a child location that will be
subordinate to the selected location.
2 Type in or modify the Location Editor fields as required:
Figure 4-13: Location Editor (New)
Parameter Description
General parameters
Name Enter a unique name for the location, up to 32 printable characters.
Parent Optional. The parent of this location (the location to which this location is subordinate). Click the Open Selector icon to open the Select location window (see “The Select location Window” on page 103) through which you can select a Parent location. Click the Eraser icon to clear the Parent field.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 98
Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Locations ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Locations Manager
3 Click OK.
4.5.7 Coordinate Types
You can define locations using a variety of coordinate types, enabling accurate definition of locations for
information purposes. The following are the default coordinate types:
Coordinate Type Optional. Specifies the way coordinates are designated; see Coordinate Types below for more information. Valid types are: Country-City, Latitude-Longitude, Area Code-prefix, Vertical-Horizontal. The default is Country-City. This parameter is for information purposes only and is not used by the management system.
Coordinates Optional. The coordinates of the location, using the Coordinate Type specified above. Up to 80 printable characters. This parameter is for information purposes only and is not used by the management system.
Images
Icon Select an icon from the drop-down list to associate it with the location.
Available icons are: Building, Location. The default is Building.
Topology Image Optional. Click the Open Selector icon to open the Open window through which you can select a map image and associate it with the location. Click the Eraser icon to clear the field. Click the Preview button to view the associated map.
Depending on whether or not an image is assigned, the label changes from "No image assigned" to "Image assigned".
Details
Postal Address An optional field for entering the address of the location. A string of up to 80 characters.
Location Details An optional field for entering a description of the location. A string of up to 80 characters.
Parameter Description
Country-City Country and city access codes.
Example: 049-071
Latitude-Longitude Latitude and longitude.
Example: 38.57N, 121.47W
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 99
Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Locations ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Locations Manager
4.5.8 The Logical Location Map
The logical location map provides s a topology view of the network, displaying for each location all
associated devices and sub-locations.
In the Equipment Manager, select a single device and click on the Open Map action, or:
In the Active Events Manager, select a single entry and click on the Open Map action, or:
In the Event History Manager, select a single entry and click on the Open Map action.
The location map window for the relevant location will open, displaying its sub-locations and the
equipment associated with it.
Area Code-Prefix Area code and prefix.
Example: 916-939
Vertical-Horizontal Vertical / horizontal coordinates, developed by Bell Systems.
INFORMATION
Coordinates type and coordinates values are not used for displaying the location in geographic maps. They are available for informational purposes only.
To open the logical location map:
INFORMATION
The Open Map action is available only if a location is assigned to the relevant device.
In the Local CRAFT Utility, the map displays only the licensed equipment.
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 100
Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Locations ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Locations Manager
The background color of each device icon presented in the map is according to the alarm state of the
device:
Critical: Red
Major: Orange
Minor: Yellow
Warning: Blue
Indeterminate: Purple
Other: Grey
Cleared: Green
The background color of each location’s icon is according to the alarm state of the device with highest
alarm severity among all relevant devices.
The following operations are available:
Figure 4-14: Location Map
AlvariSTAR User Manual 101
Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Locations ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Locations Manager
Click on the Up one level button, or right-click anywhere on the map view (except on an icon) and
select the Up one level option to open the map for the parent location. The Up one level action is
disabled if there is no parent location for the currently displayed location.
Place the mouse over a location icon to view a bubble with its details (Name and Type).
Place the mouse over a device icon to view a bubble with its details (Name, Type, Running SW
Version, IP Address, Location, Management State and Serial Number).
Right-click on a location icon and select the Drill down option, or double-click on the location icon, to
display the map for the selected location.
Right-click on a device icon to display the following options:
» Configure: Opens a BTS the configuration manager for the selected device, enabling full
configuration management capabilities. The name of the newly opened tab is BTS <BTS
Number>. Not available if the Operational State of the selected device is Disabled.
» Cut Through: Opens a Telnet session to the selected device in a separate window. Not available if
the Operational State of the selected device is other than Enabled.
» Open alarms: Opens the Open Alarms window, enabling to view the active alarms (if any)
associated with the selected device.
You can drag-and-drop the location and device icons to re-arrange the way they are displayed. Click
on the Save button to save the modified view.
INFORMATION
You can also double-click on a device icon to open the BTS configuration manager for the selected device.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 102
Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Locations ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Locations Manager
4.5.9 The Select location Window
The Select location window is opened whenever there is a need to assign a location to one or several
specific entities, such as when creating/editing a Network Settings entry in the Discovery Manager, when
using the Edit Connectivity action in the Equipment Manager for updating the parameters of one or
several devices or when using the Location option in either the Event Template Editor or the NBI Policy
Editor.
All available locations are displayed using hierarchy view.
Use the hide/expose sign to the left of each location with sub-locations to hide/expose all relevant
sub-locations.
You can use the free-text Search text box in the Find Locations panel together with the Next and
Previous buttons to find locations that include the defined search string anywhere in their name.
Select a single location and click Apply to assign the location to the relevant entity/entities.
Figure 4-15: Select location
AlvariSTAR User Manual 103
Chapter 5 - Events
In This Chapter:
“Event History Manager” on page 105
“NBI Events Forwarding Manager” on page 116
“NBI Policy Manager” on page 121
“Event Templates Manager” on page 128
“Script Commands Manager” on page 141
Chapter 5 - EventsEvent History ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event History Manager
5.1 Event History Manager
This section includes:
Introduction to the Event History Manager
Event History Main Area
Event Details
Event History Actions Panel
Find Events Panel
5.1.1 Introduction to the Event History Manager
The Event History manager displays details of all events that occurred in the system
Select Events> Event History from the Main Menu. The Event History tab is added to the tabs ribbon and
the Event History Manager screen is displayed:
5.1.2 Event History Main Area
This section includes:
Event History Table
Event Types
To open the Event History Manager:
Figure 5-1: The Event History Manager Screen
AlvariSTAR User Manual 105
Chapter 5 - EventsEvent History ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event History Manager
Event Severity
5.1.2.1 Event History Table
The Event History Main Area comprises a table that by default includes all the events that were received
from devices that can be managed by the specific user. The display is updated whenever an alarm is
received or cleared.
To freeze the display such that the display of incoming events is suppressed, click on the Freeze button
located above the table in the top right corner of the Main Area. When in Freeze mode, the button label
changes to Unfreeze, enabling to return to the default state of displaying incoming events on the fly.
Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.
By default, the information displayed for each active event includes:
Figure 5-2: The Event History Table
Parameter Description
Event Severity Icon An event icon whose color is according to event severity:
Critical: Red
Major: Orange
Minor: Yellow
Warning: Blue
Indeterminate: Purple
Other: Grey
Cleared: Green
A sign on the right side of the event icon indicates an event that was cleared (either manually by the user or automatically by the system).
The Icon column has a fixed width and it cannot be moved or deleted.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 106
Chapter 5 - EventsEvent History ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event History Manager
Additional optional information columns are:
5.1.2.2 Event Types
The possible Event Types are:
Severity The severity of the event. Refer to “Event Severity” on page 108.
Event Category The category classification of the event. The event categories are: Alarm, State Change, System Event, Config Change.
Event Name The name of the event. If the name is blank when received by the application, the event takes the name of the event template used for processing the event (see “Event Templates Manager” on page 128).
Receive Time The time and date of receiving the event.
Event Time The time and date of the event occurrence.
IP Address The IP address of the equipment reporting this event.
Equipment Type The type of equipment reporting this event.
Equipment The name of the equipment reporting this event, accompanied by the BTS Number.
Managed Object The managed object (MO) physical or logical component in the equipment associated with the event.
Alias The name of the physical or logical component/sub-component in the equipment associated with the event.
Event Type The classification type of the event. Available event types vary according to the event category. For more details see “Event Types” on page 107.
Cleared By The user who manually cleared the event (if applicable).
Clear Time The date and time at which the event was manually cleared. (if applicable).
Parameter Description
Acked By The user who acknowledged the event (if applicable).
Ack Time The date and time the event was acknowledged (if applicable).
Last Update Time The date and time at which the last update of the event was received.
Location The location assigned to the equipment reporting the event (if any).
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 107
Chapter 5 - EventsEvent History ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event History Manager
5.1.2.3 Event Severity
The management system is delivered with a set of default event severity definitions, each with its own
default color.
The default severity definitions are:
Event Category Event Type
Alarm Other
Communications Alarm
Quality of Service Alarm
Processing Error Alarm
Equipment Alarm
Environmental Alarm
Integrity Violation
Operational Violation
Physical Violation
Security Violation
Time Domain Violation
State Change State Or Status Change
System Event System Event
Software Download
Backup Configuration File
Maintenance
Telnet Session
Config Change Config Change
Entity Added
Entity Changed
Entity Removed
Parameter Description
Critical (red) A service-halting condition occurs, requiring immediate corrective action. The equipment is completely out of service and you must restore its capability.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 108
Chapter 5 - EventsEvent History ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event History Manager
All the above severities are applicable only for Alarm events. The severity for all events belonging to
other event categories is always Other (grey), meaning no severity.
The Severity of events received from managed devices is according to the severity level defined in the
device for each specific event.
5.1.3 Event Details
The Event Details section is applicable only for s single selected event and it includes the following tabs:
Events Details General Tab
Events Details Status Tab
Events Details Parameters Tab
Events Details Other Info Tab
Events Details Notes Tab
Major (orange) A service-affecting condition has developed and corrective action is required. There is severe degradation in the equipment’s capability and you must restore its full capability.
Minor (yellow) A non-service-affecting fault condition exists and corrective action should be taken in order to prevent a more serious fault. The detected event condition is not currently degrading the capacity of the equipment.
Warning (blue) A potential or impending service-affecting fault could occur, and no significant effects have yet been felt. Action should be taken to further diagnose and correct the problem to prevent it from becoming a more serious service-affecting fault. The detected event condition does not currently pose a problem, but may degrade the capacity of the equipment if you do not take corrective action.
Indeterminate (purple) Indicates an event for which the perceived severity is uncertain, due to any cause.
Cleared (green) The problem has been corrected.
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 109
Chapter 5 - EventsEvent History ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event History Manager
5.1.3.1 Events Details General Tab
The General tab displays the following details for the selected event:
Figure 5-3: Event Details General Tab
Parameter Description
Equipment Name The name of the equipment.
Equipment Type The type of equipment.
Managed Object The managed object (MO) physical or logical component in the equipment associated with the event.
Alias The name of the physical or logical component/sub-component in the equipment associated with the event.
Location Name The location assigned to the equipment.
Event Category The category classification of the event. The event categories are: Alarm, State Change, System Event, Config Change.
Event Type The classification type of the event. Event types vary according to the event category. For details refer to “Event Types” on page 107.
Event Name The name of the event. If the name is blank when received by the application, the event takes the name of the event template used for processing.
Event Description An optional text description of the event as defined in the related event template.
Event Severity The severity of the event.
Object Severity The event severity of the managed object associated with the event.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 110
Chapter 5 - EventsEvent History ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event History Manager
5.1.3.2 Events Details Status Tab
The Status tab displays the following details for the selected event:
5.1.3.3 Events Details Parameters Tab
The Parameters tab displays the following details for the selected event:
Figure 5-4: Event Details Status Tab
Parameter Description
Last Update Time The date and time at which the last update of the event was received.
Receive Time The date and time at which the event was received.
Event Time The date and time at which the event actually occurred.
Ack Time The date and time at which event was acknowledged (if applicable).
Acked By The user who acknowledged the event (if applicable).
Clear Time The date and time that the event was cleared (if applicable).
Cleared By The user who cleared the event (if applicable).
Figure 5-5: Event Details Parameters Tab
AlvariSTAR User Manual 111
Chapter 5 - EventsEvent History ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event History Manager
5.1.3.4 Events Details Other Info Tab
The Other Info tab displays the following details for the selected event:
Parameter Description
Event Severity The severity of the event.
Object Severity The severity of the object associated with the event.
Probable Cause The probable cause of the event.
Specific Problem The specific problem that caused the event.
Cleared By The user who cleared the event (if applicable).
Clear Time The date and time at which the event was cleared (if applicable).
Clear Cause The reason the event was cleared (if applicable).
Figure 5-6: Event Details Other Info Tab
Parameter Description
Protocol The protocol used for the event. The current version supports SNMP only.
Source IP Address The IP address of the equipment that sent the event.
SNMP Version The number of SNMP version used by the equipment.
Generic Trap The generic trap code. It indicates an enterprise specific trap. Possible values: 0,1,2,3,4,6
Specific Trap The specific trap code as defined in the MIB, used only if Generic trap is 6.
Enterprise OID The SNMP trap Object Identification number.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 112
Chapter 5 - EventsEvent History ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event History Manager
In addition, a table that contains all trap attributes together their OID and Value is displayed at the
bottom.
5.1.3.5 Events Details Notes Tab
The Notes tab displays the following details for the selected event
5.1.4 Event History Actions Panel
The Event History Actions panel includes the following options
System Up Time Up time of the equipment.
Figure 5-7: Event Details Notes Tab
Parameter Description
Event Advisor Displays a text description of the event and sometimes proposes a remedy. For example, “The device has received an improperly authorized protocol message. The message has been discarded.” The default message displayed in the Advisor page comes from the trap’s MIB, but the message can be edited in the Event Template Editor Behavior page (see “Behavior Tab” on page 137). The Advisor message is the default message for any e-mails sent about the event.
Proposed Repair Actions The proposed remedy for the event. The remedy comes from the trap’s MIB.
General Notes Applicable only for an event for which a General Note was defined in the Active Events manager using the Event Note action. A note entered by a user providing additional information on the specific event instance.
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 113
Chapter 5 - EventsEvent History ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event History Manager
5.1.5 Find Events Panel
For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.
The simple Search option is performed on Equipment column.
Pre-defined Filters include:
Severity: Available options include all possible severities. Each severity will be accompanied by (X/Y),
where X is the number of currently displayed (filtered using all possible search/filter options) events
with the relevant severity, and Y is the current total number of events with the relevant severity in the
database. Multiple selection of different Severities is supported.
Acknowledged: Enabling to display only acknowledged events. Acknowledge events are alarm events
acknowledged in the Active Events manager.
Time Before: Enabling to display only events received not later than a certain time ago. Available
options include 1 hour, 6 hours, 12 hours, 1 day, 1 week, 1 month.
Equipment Type: Available options include all possible equipment types that are supported by the
currently installed Device Drivers, plus the NMS equipment. Multiple selection is supported.
Option Action
Configure Opens a BTS configuration manager for the relevant device, enabling full configuration management capabilities. The name of the newly opened tab is BTS <BTS Number>. Not available if two or more events are selected. The BTS configuration manager will not be opened if the Operational State of the relevant device is Disabled.
Cut Through Opens a Telnet session to the relevant device in a separate window. Not available if two or more events are selected. A Telnet session will not be opened if the Operational State of the relevant device is Disabled.
Open Location Available only for a single selected event. Opens the logical map for the location of the relevant device (provided it has an assigned location). For details refer to “The Logical Location Map” on page 100.
Export Exports the selected event(s) and creates a Comma Separated Value (CSV) file. All details of selected event(s) are exported, including columns that are currently hidden.
Click to open the Export Events window, browse to the desired location on the client file-system, enter the File Name, and click Export to export the event(s).
Print Preview Displays a preview of the current page before printing. See details in Print below.
Print Prints the entire current page, including columns that are currently hidden.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 114
Chapter 5 - EventsEvent History ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event History Manager
Managed Object Type: Available option include all MO Types relevant to the selected Equipment
Type(s). Multiple selection is supported.
Advanced Filters include the following criteria:
Equipment (Name)
Equipment Number (BTS Number, added to equipment name in Equipment column)
IP Address
Event Category
Event Type
AlvariSTAR User Manual 115
Chapter 5 - EventsNBI Events Forwarding ManagerChapter 5 - Events NBI Events Forwarding Manager
5.2 NBI Events Forwarding Manager
This section includes:
Introduction to the NBI Events Forwarding Manager
NBI Events Forwarding Main Area
NBI Events Forwarding Details Panels
NBI Events Forwarding Actions Panel
Find NBI Events Forwarding Panel
The NBI Editor
5.2.1 Introduction to the NBI Events Forwarding Manager
The NBI (North Bound Interface) Events Forwarding manager provides management of the North Bound
Interface that allows connecting to other management systems and effectively forwarding specific (or
all) traps to these systems.
Select Events> NBI Events Forwarding from the Main Menu. The NBI Events Forwarding tab is added to
the tabs ribbon and the NBI Events Forwarding Manager screen is displayed.
The NBI Events Forwarding Manager is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility.
INFORMATION
Refer also to “NBI Notifications” on page 236 for details on configuring general NBI Notifications parameters common to all NBI Event Forwarding instances.
To open the NBI Events Forwarding Manager:
AlvariSTAR User Manual 116
Chapter 5 - EventsNBI Events Forwarding ManagerChapter 5 - Events NBI Events Forwarding Manager
5.2.2 NBI Events Forwarding Main Area
The NBI Events Forwarding grid view comprises a table that includes details on all the currently
configured NBI Events Forwarding instances.
Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.
By default, the read-only information displayed for each instance includes:
Figure 5-8: The NBI Events Forwarding Table
Parameter Description
Name The name of the NBI Events Forwarding instance.
Description A description of the NBI Events Forwarding instance.
IP Address The IP address of the higher hierarchy manager to which relevant events should be forwarded.
Protocol The protocol use for communication with the higher hierarchy manager (SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, SNMPv3).
Event Forwarding The NPI event forwarding status (Enabled/Disabled).
AlvariSTAR User Manual 117
Chapter 5 - EventsNBI Events Forwarding ManagerChapter 5 - Events NBI Events Forwarding Manager
5.2.3 NBI Events Forwarding Details Panels
The NBI Events Forwarding Details section is applicable only for single selected NBI Events Forwarding
instance and it includes the same parameters that are available in the Main area, plus the SNMP Trap
Port (the destination port for traps forwarded from the management system).
5.2.4 NBI Events Forwarding Actions Panel
The NBI Events Forwarding Actions panel includes the following options:
5.2.5 Find NBI Events Forwarding Panel
For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to“Find Panel” on page 12.
Figure 5-9: NBI Events Forwarding Details
Option Action
New Adds a new NBI Events Forwarding instance to the database. Opens the NBI Events Forwarding Editor, allowing to define properties of the NBI Events Forwarding instance to be created. For more details, see “The NBI Editor” on page 119.
Edit Available only for a single selected NBI Events Forwarding instance. Opens the NBI Events Forwarding Editor for the selected instance, allowing to edit some of it’s properties. For more details, see “The NBI Editor” on page 119.
Delete Deletes the selected NBI Events Forwarding instance(s) from the database.
Policy Opens the Select Policy window (see “The NBI Policy Selector Window” on page 120), enabling to associate an NBI Policy with the NBI Events Forwarding instance. An NBI Policy defines the event(s) to be forwarded by the NBI Events Forwarding. For more details see “NBI Policy Manager” on page 121.
Only one policy may be assigned to an NBI Events Forwarding instance. Assigning a new policy will remove a previously assigned policy.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 118
Chapter 5 - EventsNBI Events Forwarding ManagerChapter 5 - Events NBI Events Forwarding Manager
Simple Search is performed on Name and Description columns.
Protocol (including Version) is available as a Pre-Defined Filter. Multiple selection is supported.
The Advanced Filter includes the following criteria:
IP Address
Name
Description
5.2.6 The NBI Editor
The NBI Editor enables defining a new NBI Events Forwarding instance or editing an existing one. It
includes the following parameters:
Figure 5-10: NBI Editor
Parameter Description
Name The unique name for the northbound interface. 1 to 32 characters.
Description An optional description of the Event Forwarding NBI interface. 0 to 100 characters.
Enable Check to enable trap forwarding on the interface. The default is checked (enabled).
IP Address The IP address of the remote host to which the traps will be forwarded.
Protocol In the current release the only SNMP protocol is supported.
SNMP Parameters
Version The SNMP version. Possible values are: v1, v2c or v3.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 119
Chapter 5 - EventsNBI Events Forwarding ManagerChapter 5 - Events NBI Events Forwarding Manager
5.2.7 The NBI Policy Selector Window
The NBI Policy Selector window displays details (Name and Description) of currently available NBI Policies.
For details refer to “NBI Policy Manager” on page 121. You can use the Advanced Filtering option in the
Find Policy panel to perform a search based on Name.
Select the policy you want to assign to the NBI Events Forwarding instance and click Apply.
Trap Port The port number to use to communicate with the system. The default is 162.
Figure 5-11: NBI Policy Selector
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 120
Chapter 5 - EventsNBI Policy ManagerChapter 5 - Events NBI Policy Manager
5.3 NBI Policy Manager
This section includes:
Introduction to the NBI Policy Manager
NBI Policy Main Area
NBI Policy Actions Panel
Find Policy Panel
The NBI Policy Editor
5.3.1 Introduction to the NBI Policy Manager
An NBI Policy defines event(s) to be forwarded by an NBI Event Forwarding interface to which the NBI
Policy is assigned. The NBI Policy manager provides management of the NBI Policies in the database.
Select Events> NBI Policy from the Main Menu. The NBI Policy tab is added to the tabs ribbon and the
NBI Policy Manager screen is displayed.
5.3.2 NBI Policy Main Area
The NBI Policy grid view comprises a table that includes details on all the currently configured NBI
Policies.
Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.
By default, the read-only information displayed for each instance includes:
The NBI Policy Manager is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility.
To open the NBI Policy Manager:
Figure 5-12: The NBI Policy Table
AlvariSTAR User Manual 121
Chapter 5 - EventsNBI Policy ManagerChapter 5 - Events NBI Policy Manager
5.3.3 NBI Policy Actions Panel
The NBI Policy Actions panel includes the following options:
5.3.4 Find Policy Panel
For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.
Only the Advanced Filter option is available, enabling filtering based on the Name criterion:
5.3.5 The NBI Policy Editor
The NBI Policy Editor enables defining a new NBI Policy or editing an existing Policy. After completing
definition/changes, click on the OK button to apply the new configuration.
The NBI Policy Editor comprises two tabs:
General Tab
Filter Tab
5.3.5.1 General Tab
In the General tab, you can configure general information on the policy.
Parameter Description
Name The name of the NBI Policy.
Description A description of the NBI Policy.
Option Action
New Adds a new NBI Policy to the database. Opens the NBI Policy Editor, allowing to define properties of the NBI Policy to be created. For more details, see “The NBI Policy Editor” on page 122.
Edit Available only for a single selected NBI Policy. Opens the NBI Policy Editor for the selected policy, allowing to edit some of it’s properties. For more details, see “The NBI Policy Editor” on page 122.
Delete Deletes the selected NBI Policy/Policies from the database.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 122
Chapter 5 - EventsNBI Policy ManagerChapter 5 - Events NBI Policy Manager
The General tab includes the following parameters:
5.3.5.2 Filter Tab
The Filter tab enables defining the event(s) associated with the NBI policy. These events will be forwarded
by an NBI Events Forwarding instance using the policy.
Selection fields in the Filter tab enables selection of one or multiple relevant entities.
Use the Open Selector icon to open the relevant selector window displaying all available options (in most
selection fields available options depend on previously selected options in other fields). You can use the
traditional Shift-Click and Ctrl-Click selection/de-selection methods. Click Select to confirm your
selection.
Select one or several previously selected entities and click on the Eraser icon to remove these entities
from the list of selected entities. You can use the traditional Shift-Click and Ctrl-Click
selection/de-selection methods.
The Filter tab includes 3 pages:
Figure 5-13: NBI Policy Editor - General Tab
Parameter Description
Name The name of the NBI policy. 1 to 32 characters.
Description An optional description of the policy. 0 to 100 characters.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 123
Chapter 5 - EventsNBI Policy ManagerChapter 5 - Events NBI Policy Manager
Filter Tab - NE Page
Filter Tab - Topology Page
Filter Tab - Event Page
5.3.5.2.1 Filter Tab - NE Page
The NE page enables selection of specific events. These can be either SNMP generic traps (common to all
network elements) or specific traps (applicable only for a specific device family/equipment type). The NE
page enables also selection of specific network elements/managed objects:
Figure 5-14: NBI Policy Editor - Filter Tab, NE Page
Parameter Description
Network Element Type Click on the Open Selector icon to open the Network Element Type Selector enabling selection of the network element type(s) to be included. The selection list includes all network elements supported by installed device drivers and the NMS itself.
Managed Object Type Click on the Open Selector icon to open the Managed Object Type Selector enabling selection of the managed object type(s) to be included. Available options depend on the currently selected entities in the Network Element Type field.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 124
Chapter 5 - EventsNBI Policy ManagerChapter 5 - Events NBI Policy Manager
5.3.5.2.2 Filter Tab - Topology Page
The Topology page enables optional selection of specific locations and/or network elements. Only events
sent from network elements that meet the specified criteria will be included:
Managed Object Instance Enter specific managed object instance number. Only traps from these specific managed object instance will be included. Available only if the Managed Object Type field contains a single entity.
Managed Object Alias The Alias of a managed object instance.
Event Name Click on the Open Selector icon to open the Trap Name/OID Selector Selector enabling selection of trap(s) to be included. Available options include SNMP Generic traps plus specific traps according to currently selected entities in the Network Element Type and Managed Object Type fields.
Use the hide/expose (-/+) control next to each traps group name to hide/expose traps in the group. You can use the Find option to search for specific traps: Enter a search string in the Find field and use the Find Next/Find Previous buttons to find visible traps whose name contains the search string.
Figure 5-15: NBI Policy Editor - Filter Tab, Topology Page
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 125
Chapter 5 - EventsNBI Policy ManagerChapter 5 - Events NBI Policy Manager
5.3.5.2.3 Filter Tab - Event Page
The NE and Topology pages enables selection of specific events. The Event page enables adding to
specific selected events also specific Event Categories/Event Types. If selected Event Categories include
Alarm events, it also enables selection of specific Alarm Severities.
Parameter Description
Locations You can use the Select location window (see “The Select location Window” on page 103) to select specific location(s) to be included.
Network Elements You can use the Select Equipment window (see “The Equipment Selector Window” on page 61) to select specific network elements to be included. Available options depend on the currently selected entities in the Network Element Type field (in the NE page). This option is available only if the list of selected entities in the Network Element Type field includes at least one Network Element Type other than NMS.
Figure 5-16: NBI Policy Editor - Filter Tab, Event Page
Parameter Description
Event Category Select the category classification of the event. Possible values are: Alarm, State Change, System Event, Config Change.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 126
Chapter 5 - EventsNBI Policy ManagerChapter 5 - Events NBI Policy Manager
Event Type Select the classification type of the event. The possible options depend on the currently selected Event Categories.
Severity Applicable only if the list of selected Event Categories includes Alarm events. Check the boxes for inclusion of alarms with selected severities. For more information on alarm severity see “Event Severity” on page 66.
User Classifier Select the User Classifier. Possible values: None (to include all relevant events according to other selections), Service Affecting (to include only relevant events classified as Service Affecting).
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 127
Chapter 5 - EventsEvent Templates ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event Templates Manager
5.4 Event Templates Manager
This section includes:
Introduction to the Event Templates Manager
Event Templates Main Area
Event Templates Details Panels
Event Templates Actions Panel
Find Event Templates Panel
The Event Template Editor
The Command Selector Window
5.4.1 Introduction to the Event Templates Manager
Event Templates determine how the system processes different traps sent by managed network objects.
Event templates match each incoming message with specific actions. The system is supplied with default
templates for NMS traps and for device family traps according to the installed Device Driver(s).
Select Events> Event Templates from the Main Menu. The Event Templates tab is added to the tabs
ribbon and the Event Templates Manager screen is displayed.
5.4.2 Event Templates Main Area
To open the Event Templates Manager:
Figure 5-17: The Event Templates Table
AlvariSTAR User Manual 128
Chapter 5 - EventsEvent Templates ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event Templates Manager
The Event Templates grid view comprises a table that includes details on all the Event Templates available
in the database.
Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.
By default, the read-only information displayed for each template includes:
5.4.3 Event Templates Details Panels
The Event Template Details Panel includes the following tabs for a single selected template:
Event Template Details General Tab
Event Template Details Filter Tab
Event Template Details Behavior Tab
Parameter Description
Name The name of the template.
Description A description of the template.
Owner The user who created the template. The default creator for default templates is SYSTEM.
Creation Date The template’s date of creation. The default creation date for default templates is the date and time of installing the management system.
Priority The template’s priority. The template priority determines which template should be used if the event matches more than one template. The smaller the number defining a template’s priority, the higher the priority the template is.
If the event matches two or more templates with the same priority, the first created template will be used.
If there is a template defined for specific network elements (defined in the Topology page) and other “general” template(s) (not defined for specific network elements), all having the same priority, the “specific network element” template will be used for relevant event(s) sent from the specific network elements.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 129
Chapter 5 - EventsEvent Templates ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event Templates Manager
5.4.3.1 Event Template Details General Tab
The General tab includes the same information as in the main area (see “Event Templates Main Area” on
page 128).
5.4.3.2 Event Template Details Filter Tab
The Filter tab includes all the Filter configuration details of the template (see “Filter Tab” on page 133).
Figure 5-18: Event Templates Details General Tab
Figure 5-19: Event Templates Details Filter Tab
AlvariSTAR User Manual 130
Chapter 5 - EventsEvent Templates ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event Templates Manager
5.4.3.3 Event Template Details Behavior Tab
The Filter tab includes all the Behavior configuration details of the template (see “Behavior Tab” on
page 137).
5.4.4 Event Templates Actions Panel
The Event Templates Actions panel includes the following options:
5.4.5 Find Event Templates Panel
For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.
Simple search is performed on the Name and Description columns.
The Owner and Priority parameters are available as a Pre-Defined Filtering options. Multiple selection is
supported for both.
Advanced Filter includes the following criteria:
Description
Name
Figure 5-20: Event Templates Details Behavior Tab
Option Action
New Adds a new Event Template to the database. Opens the Event Template Editor, allowing to define properties of the Event Template be created. For more details, see“The Event Template Editor” on page 132.
Edit Available only for a single selected template. Opens the Event Template Editor for the selected template, allowing to edit some of it’s properties. For more details, see “The Event Template Editor” on page 132.
Delete Deletes the selected Event Template(s) from the database. Only the Owner of a template can delete it.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 131
Chapter 5 - EventsEvent Templates ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event Templates Manager
Creation Date
5.4.6 The Event Template Editor
The Event Template Editor enables defining a new event templates or editing an existing event template.
After completing definition/changes, click on the OK button to apply the new configuration.
The Event Template Editor comprises three tabs:
General Tab
Filter Tab
Behavior Tab
5.4.6.1 General Tab
In the General tab, you can configure general parameters of the template.
The General tab includes the following parameters:
Figure 5-21: Event Template Editor - General Tab
Parameter Description
Name The name of the template. 1 to 128 characters.
Description An optional description of the template. 0 to 250 characters.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 132
Chapter 5 - EventsEvent Templates ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event Templates Manager
5.4.6.2 Filter Tab
The Filter tab enables defining the event(s) associated with the event template.
Selection fields in the Filter tab enables selection of one or multiple relevant entities.
Use the Open Selector icon to open the relevant selector window displaying all available options (in most
selection fields available options depend on previously selected options in other fields). You can use the
traditional Shift-Click and Ctrl-Click selection/de-selection methods. Click Select to confirm your
selection.
Select one or several previously selected entities and click on the Eraser icon to remove these entities
from the list of selected entities. You can use the traditional Shift-Click and Ctrl-Click
selection/de-selection methods.
The Filter tab includes 3 pages:
Filter Tab - NE Page
Filter Tab - Topology Page
Filter Tab - Event Page
Priority The template’s priority. A number in the range from 1 (the default) to 99999.
The template priority determines which template should be used if the event matches more than one template. The smaller the number defining a template’s priority, the higher the priority the template is.
If the event matches two or more templates with the same priority, the first created template will be used.
If there is a template defined for specific network elements (defined in the Topology page) and other “general” template(s) (not defined for specific network elements), all having the same priority, the “specific network element” template will be used for relevant event(s) sent from the specific network elements.
Owner Read-only. When editing an existing template - the user who created the template. For a new template - the name of the logged in user.
Creation Date Read-only. The date and time of template’s creation. For a new template this is the current date and time.
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 133
Chapter 5 - EventsEvent Templates ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event Templates Manager
5.4.6.2.1 Filter Tab - NE Page
The NE page enables selection of specific events. These can be either SNMP generic traps (common to all
network elements) or specific traps (applicable only for a specific device family/equipment type). The NE
page enables also selection of specific network elements/managed objects:
Figure 5-22: Event Template Editor - Filter Tab, NE Page
Parameter Description
Network Element Type Click on the Open Selector icon to open the Network Element Type Selector enabling selection of the network element type(s) to be included. The selection list includes all network elements supported by installed device drivers and the NMS itself.
Managed Object Type Click on the Open Selector icon to open the Managed Object Type Selector enabling selection of the managed object type(s) to be included. Available options depend on the currently selected entities in the Network Element Type field.
Managed Object Instance Enter specific managed object instance number. Only traps from these specific managed object instance will be included. Available only if the Managed Object Type field contains a single entity.
Managed Object Alias The Alias of a managed object instance.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 134
Chapter 5 - EventsEvent Templates ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event Templates Manager
5.4.6.2.2 Filter Tab - Topology Page
The Topology page enables optional selection of specific locations and/or network elements. Only events
sent from network elements that meet the specified criteria will be included:
Event Name Click on the Open Selector icon to open the Trap Name/OID Selector Selector enabling selection of trap(s) to be included. Available options include SNMP Generic traps plus specific traps according to currently selected entities in the Network Element Type and Managed Object Type fields.
Use the hide/expose (-/+) control next to each traps group name to hide/expose traps in the group. You can use the Find option to search for specific traps: Enter a search string in the Find field and use the Find Next/Find Previous buttons to find visible traps whose name contains the search string.
Figure 5-23: Event Template Editor - Filter Tab, Topology Page
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 135
Chapter 5 - EventsEvent Templates ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event Templates Manager
5.4.6.2.3 Filter Tab - Event Page
The NE and Topology pages enables selection of specific events. The Event page enables adding to
specific selected events also specific Event Categories/Event Types. If selected Event Categories include
Alarm events, it also enables selection of specific Alarm Severities.
Parameter Description
Locations You can use the Select location window (see “The Select location Window” on page 103) to select specific location(s). If one or more locations are selected, only network elements from these locations can be included.
Network Elements You can use the Select Equipment window (see “The Equipment Selector Window” on page 61) to select specific network elements to be included. Available options depend on the currently selected entities in the Network Element Type field (in the NE page). This option is available only if the list of selected entities in the Network Element Type field includes at least one Network Element Type other than NMS.
Figure 5-24: Event Template Editor - Filter Tab, Event Page
AlvariSTAR User Manual 136
Chapter 5 - EventsEvent Templates ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event Templates Manager
5.4.6.3 Behavior Tab
The Behavior tab defines the actions to be executed upon receiving a matching event. It includes two
pages:
Actions Page
Email Page
5.4.6.3.1 Actions Page
Parameter Description
Event Category Select the category classification of the event. Possible values are: Alarm, State Change, System Event, Config Change.
Event Type Select the classification type of the event. The possible options depend on the currently selected Event Categories.
Severity Applicable only if the list of selected Event Categories includes Alarm events. Check the boxes for inclusion of alarms with selected severities. For more information on alarm severity see “Event Severity” on page 66.
User Classifier Select the User Classifier. Possible values: None (to include all relevant events according to other selections), Service Affecting (to include only relevant events classified as Service Affecting).
Figure 5-25: Event Template Editor - Behavior Tab, Actions Page
AlvariSTAR User Manual 137
Chapter 5 - EventsEvent Templates ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event Templates Manager
The Actions page contains the following parameters:
5.4.6.3.2 Email Page
Use the Email page to enter a message that appears in e-mails when the template is activated and define
a list of recipients to be notified (applicable only if email functions are available in the NMS server).
Parameter Description
Script Command Use this option to select the pre-configured external script command to be executed. Click the Open Selector icon to open the Command Selector window (see “The Command Selector Window” on page 140).
User Classifier Select the User Classifier. Possible values: None, Service Affecting
Alarm Severity Applicable only for Alarm events. Selects the severity level to be assigned to the alarm. Once the template is selected, before actually processing the alarm, this field overrides the severity of the alarm as it was received from the originating device. Possible values are: No Change (the default), Cleared, Indeterminate, Warning, Minor, Major, Critical.
Requires Acknowledge Check to require that the associated event is acknowledged. The default is not selected. If selected for a non-alarm event (severity Other), this event will be added to list of events that should be displayed in the Active Events manager (see “The Active Events Manager” on page 62).
Advisor Message Enter a text description of the event.
The Email page is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 138
Chapter 5 - EventsEvent Templates ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event Templates Manager
The Email page contains the following parameters:
Figure 5-26: Event Template Editor - Behavior Tab, Email Page
Parameter Description
Auto Send Email Check to automatically send a defined email message to the specified recipient(s) whenever the associated event occurs.
To Select the recipient for this email message from the list.
Subject Enter the subject line of the email message.
Message Enter an email message.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 139
Chapter 5 - EventsEvent Templates ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event Templates Manager
5.4.7 The Command Selector Window
The Command Selector window displays currently available script commands. For more details refer to
“Script Commands Manager” on page 141. You can use the Advanced Filtering option in the Find
Command panel to perform a search based on Name and/or Description.
Select the command you want to execute upon receiving a matching event and click Apply.
Figure 5-27: Command Selector
AlvariSTAR User Manual 140
Chapter 5 - EventsScript Commands ManagerChapter 5 - Events Script Commands Manager
5.5 Script Commands Manager
This section includes:
Introduction to the Script Commands Manager
Script Commands Main Area
Script Commands Details Panels
Script Commands Actions Panel
Find Scripts Panel
The Command Editor
5.5.1 Introduction to the Script Commands Manager
An Event Template may be configured to trigger automatic execution of a pre-prepared script (see
“Event Template Details Behavior Tab” on page 131). The Script Commands manager enables
management of such pre-prepared script commands.
Select Events> Script Commands from the Main Menu. The Script Commands tab is added to the tabs
ribbon and the Script Commands Manager screen is displayed.
5.5.2 Script Commands Main Area
The Script Commands grid view comprises a table that includes details on all the currently available
Script Commands.
Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.
By default, the read-only information displayed for each Script Command includes:
To open the Script Commands Manager:
Figure 5-28: The Script Commands Table
Parameter Description
Name The name of the Script Command.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 141
Chapter 5 - EventsScript Commands ManagerChapter 5 - Events Script Commands Manager
5.5.3 Script Commands Details Panels
The Script Command Details Panel includes the following details for a single selected command:
Command Name
Description
Command Line
Script Name
Script Path
For details on these parameters see “The Command Editor” on page 143.
5.5.4 Script Commands Actions Panel
The Script Commands Actions panel includes the following options:
5.5.5 Find Scripts Panel
For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.
Description A description of the Script Command.
Figure 5-29: Script Commands Details
Option Action
New Adds a new Script Commands to the database. Opens the Command Editor, allowing to define properties of the Script Commands be created. For more details, see “The Command Editor” on page 143.
Edit Available only for a single selected Script Commands. Opens the Command Editor for the selected Script Commands, allowing to edit some of it’s properties. For more details, see “The Command Editor” on page 143.
Delete Deletes the selected Script Command(s) from the database.
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 142
Chapter 5 - EventsScript Commands ManagerChapter 5 - Events Script Commands Manager
Only Advanced Filter is available and it includes the Name and Description criteria:
5.5.6 The Command Editor
The Command Editor includes the following fields:
Figure 5-30: The Command Editor
Parameter Description
Command Information
Command Name A unique text identifier.
Description A text description
Command Details
Script Name The name of the script to run
Script Path The location of the script.
Command Argument
Argument Option Enter a text value
Argument Type Possible values are: Constant, Event Property
Argument Value If Argument Type = Constant, this is a text field
If Argument Type = Event Property then select from a list of possible attributes
AlvariSTAR User Manual 143
Chapter 5 - EventsScript Commands ManagerChapter 5 - Events Script Commands Manager
After completing configuration of a new Command or changing an existing Command click OK to apply
the new configuration.
Text Qualifier Select whether this parameter needs double, single quotes, or no qualifier. When you select quotes, the parameter looks like this: -a “surrounded by quotes”.
Command Line This section of the screen displays the script command as you assemble it. Click the Add button on the right to assemble the complete script command. Added parameters always appear last on the list in this area, but you can use the arrow keys to re-arrange their order, and the Delete button to remove a selected parameter (but not the script). Delete All removes everything.
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 144
Chapter 6 - MS Services
In This Chapter:
“MS Manager” on page 146
“The MS Connection Maintenance Manager” on page 156
Chapter 6 - MS ServicesMS ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services MS Manager
6.1 MS Manager
This section includes:
Introduction to the MS Manager
MS Main Area
MS Details Panels
MS Actions Panel
Find MS Panel
Switching to Map View for a selected MS
Editing MS Location Details
Notes on Available MS Information
6.1.1 Introduction to the MS Manager
The MS manager displays details of Mobile MSs in the network using information retrieved from relevant
management systems. It also enables several operations for a selected MS (subject to certain conditions),
such as displaying it on a a geographical map or opening in a separate window the StarACS or
StarQuality in the specific MS context.
To support full functionally of the MS manager both StarACS and StarQuality should be installed.
Select MS Services > MS from the Main Menu. The MS tab is added to the tabs ribbon and the MS
Manager is displayed.
To open the MS Manager
AlvariSTAR User Manual 146
Chapter 6 - MS ServicesMS ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services MS Manager
6.1.2 MS Main Area
The MS grid view comprises a table that includes details on all the subscriber units for whom relevant
information is available. Relevant information is gathered from StarQuality and StarACS (for Extreme
some information is available also from the management system’s own data base, gathered from the
serving BTS equipment). If no updated data related to a specific MS is gathered for a period of 24 hours,
this MS will be removed from the database. This aging mechanism will not be activated if both StarACS
and StarQuality has become unavailable.
Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.
By default, the read-only information displayed for each MS includes:
:
Figure 6-1: The MS Table
Parameter Description
MAC Address The MS’s MAC Address
Serial Number The MS’s Serial Number
Product Model The product model of the MS
Last Conn Date Last data and time at which the MS connected to the serving BS.
BS ID The BS ID of the BS currently serving the MS.
SW Version The MS’s running SW version
Lat/Long The latitude/longitude coordinates of the MS, if known. For details on getting MS’s latitude/longitude coordinates refer to “Editing MS Location Details” on page 151 and “MS Coordinates Import” on page 240.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 147
Chapter 6 - MS ServicesMS ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services MS Manager
6.1.3 MS Details Panels
The MS Details section is applicable only for s single selected entry and it includes the following details:
MAC Address: The MS’s MAC Address
Model: The MS’s Model type (if available)
Status: connected or No data is available. For 4Motion/COMPACT the status will be No data is
available if StarQuality is not available. For Extreme the status will be No data is available if there is no
information for the MS in the management system’s database. Otherwise the status is connected.
6.1.4 MS Actions Panel
The MS Actions panel includes the following options that are available only for a single selected MS:
INFORMATION
For more details on displayed information under different conditions refer to
Figure 6-2: MS Details
Option Action
Operations
Show on Map Switch to map view (if applicable for the selected MS), showing the selected MS on the geographical map. For details refer to “Switching to Map View for a selected MS” on page 150.
Edit Opens the MS Edit location window (see “Editing MS Location Details” on page 151), enabling to modify unit’s location details. Applicable only for an MS that is managed by StarACS.
Links
Performance Available only for an MS that is monitored by StarQuality. Click the cut-through link to open in a separate window the StarQuality in the specific MS context.
Management Available only for an that is managed by StarACS. Click the cut-through link to open in a separate window the StarACS in the specific MS context.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 148
Chapter 6 - MS ServicesMS ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services MS Manager
6.1.5 Find MS Panel
For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.
Simple Search enables searching for MS(s) with either a MAC Address or a Serial Number containing a
specified text string (case in-sensitive). Enter a complete MAC address/serial number to search for a
specific MS, or a partial MAC address/serial number string to search for MSs that the specified string is
included anywhere in their MAC address/serial number (for example, type E7-30 to search for all MSs
whose MAC address includes the string E7-30). Leave the text box empty to search for all MSs in the
database. Only MS(s) that meets this criterion (and, if applicable, criteria defined by other filtering
options) will be displayed. Click on the Find icon ( ) to initiate the search. Clear the text box to remove
the search criterion.
Advanced Filters include the following criteria:
MAC Address: specify a complete MAC address to search for a specific MS, or a partial address string
to search for MSs that the specified string is included anywhere in their MAC address (for
example-type E7-30 to search for all MSs whose MAC address includes the string E7-30). Leave the
text box empty to search for all MSs in the database.
Serial Number: Specify a complete Serial Number or a partial prefix string (for example-type 7053 to
search for all MSs whose serial number starts with 7053.
Model: Available options depend on Model types that exist in the database. Click on the drop-down
menu option on the right side to display all available options. Select a specific Model or All (the
default).
BS ID: Specify a complete BS ID or a partial prefix string (for example-type 130.131.30.14 to search
for all MSs served by any BS whose BS ID starts with 130.131.30.14).
The search strings are not case-sensitive.
The results include only “connected” MSs:
4Motion/COMPACT: MSs available in the database of StarQuality that had at least one collection in
the last 24 hours (including MSs not available in the database of StarACS).
Extreme: MSs available in the database of AlvariSTAR (including MSs not available in the database of
StarACS).
In addition, the Search Type option enables selecting one of the following pre-defined searches:
Table 6-1: MS Pre-Defined Search
Name Description
MSs Registered Since MSs registered since a certain date (see below instructions for date definition)
MSs Rebooted Since MSs rebooted since a certain date (see below instructions for date definition)
AlvariSTAR User Manual 149
Chapter 6 - MS ServicesMS ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services MS Manager
For “Since” searches, a Date definition text box is opened, allowing to specify relevant date. The default
date is the current date. Specify a different date using one of the following options:
Enter required date directly in the text field (or edit required components of current date).
Click the down arrow on the right side of the field and select a date from the calendar graphic
display.
6.1.6 Switching to Map View for a selected MS
The Show on Map feature is applicable only for users that are assigned the Map Users User Profile.
Click on the Show On Map cut-through link to view the MS’s location on a map. This is applicable only
if at least one of the following conditions is fulfilled:
The MS is served by a BTS with known coordinates.
The geolocation information (Latitude/Longitude) of the MS is stored in the system (see “Editing MS
Location Details” on page 151 and “MS Coordinates Import” on page 240).
The Latitude/Longitude information is not available, but the address information of the MS is stored
in the system (see “Editing MS Location Details” on page 151 and “MS Coordinates Import” on
MSs Not Updated Since MSs not updated since a certain date (see below instructions for date definition)
MSs without Lat/Long MSs with address information and without latitude/longitude information.The resulting list contains MSs that were loaded using the MS Coordinates Import utility (see “MS Coordinates Import” on page 240) that have address information and do not have complete latitude and longitude information. The list includes also MSs that were loaded with address information and later the address information was deleted either by loading an “ADDR” MSs file with null information for the MS or through the MS Edit Location feature (see “Editing MS Location Details” on page 151).
MSs without Address MSs with latitude/longitude information and without address information. The resulting list contains MSs that were loaded using the MS Coordinates Import utility (see “MS Coordinates Import” on page 240) that have latitude and longitude information and do not have complete address information. The list includes also MSs that were loaded with latitude/longitude information and later the latitude/longitude information was deleted either by loading a “LATLONG” MSs file with null information for the MS or through the MS Edit Location feature (see “Editing MS Location Details” on page 151).
Table 6-1: MS Pre-Defined Search
Name Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 150
Chapter 6 - MS ServicesMS ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services MS Manager
page 240) and the system can find the geolocation based on this address using Bing Maps
Geolocation Services (see more details below).
The system displays messages indicating missing information.
If only the address of the MS is known, the system tries finding its coordinates using Bing Maps
Geolocation Services:
If the geolocation service fails, the system notifies the user about the existence of an address which
cannot be mapped to latitude/longitude coordinates, and displays the MS in the center of the serving
sector.
If the geolocation services returned one result, the latitude/longitude coordinates are stored and the
MS is displayed in its geolocation. This MS no longer is available in the MSs without Lat/Long search
results.
If the geolocation services returned more than one result, a list of options are presented to the user.
The latitude/longitude coordinates of the selected location are stored and the MS is displayed in the
selected geolocation. This MS no longer is available in the MSs without Lat/Long search results.
The system displays for several seconds a blinking MS icon at its geolocation (if available). Otherwise, the
icon is displayed at the center of the serving sector. The contour of the serving sector also blinks together
with the MS’s icon.
For more details on Map View refer to “Map View” on page 31.
6.1.7 Editing MS Location Details
Click on the Edit action link of an MS entry to open the Edit Location window.
The Edit Location window enables updating/adding/deleting geolocation (Latitude, Longitude) and/or
Address (Address, City, Country) information for the MS.
Figure 6-3: Edit Location
AlvariSTAR User Manual 151
Chapter 6 - MS ServicesMS ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services MS Manager
Note that even if you delete all location information for an MS it remains in the MSs without
Address/MSs without Lat/Long search results. MSs are removed from these lists only if both address and
geolocation details exist (either through manual editing or through geolocating an address using Bing
Maps Geolocation Services).
Click OK to store the changes in the management system.
Click Cancel to cancel the changes.
If only Address information is defined than after clicking OK the address information will be stored in
the management system, a geolocation task for the specified address will be initiated and the system
will switch to Map View:
If the geolocation service returned one result, the Latitude and Longitude information are updated
accordingly and the coordinates are stored in the management system. The found geolocation will be
indicated on the map. The MS is no longer included in search results for MSs without Address/MSs
without Lat/Long.
If the geolocation service returned more than one results, you are presented by a list of options. After
selecting the preferred option, the selected geolocation will be indicated on the map. However, the
coordinates of the selected option are not stored in the management system.
If the geolocation service did not return any result, you receive a message indicating the failure to
geolocate the specified address.
6.1.8 Notes on Available MS Information
Information for Extreme MSs is collected from AlvariSTAR.
Information for 4Motion and COMPACT is collected from StarQuality and StarACS.
To present data in the MS table the system collects all data from AlvariSTAR, StarQuality and StarACS
and then merges it.
The status of “connected” for an MS is taken from AlvariSTAR (for MSs associated to Extreme
equipment) or from StarQuality (for MSs associated to 4Motion/COMPACT equipment).
The MS information received from AlvariSTAR and StarQuality is an association pair (MAC, BS ID). The
MAC is the MAC Address of the MS and BS ID is the serving BS ID.
If StarACS is installed, more information on the MS is available (S/N, Product Model, etc) in addition to
MAC and BS ID details.
When merging data from all 3 sources, the merged data will contain the BS ID from AlvariSTAR or
StarQuality (if available) and not from StarACS, That is because AlvariSTAR and StarQuality has more
recent and reliable data than StarACS.
So the main principles are:
All data received from AlvariSTAR/StarQuality is data about connected MSs
All data about MSs received from AlvariSTAR/StarQuality has priority over data received from StarACS
AlvariSTAR User Manual 152
Chapter 6 - MS ServicesMS ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services MS Manager
All data about MSs received from AlvariSTAR has priority over StarQuality data. If we get a pair
(MAC,BS ID) from AlvariSTAR and a pair (MAC,BS ID) from StarQuality with the same MAC but with
different BS IDs, the final BS ID will be that received from AlvariSTAR
The steps in the process of preparing the final data will be:
1 Get data from AlvariSTAR
2 Get data from StarQuality
3 Get data from StarACS
4 Merge data from all available sources
Merging of data is made in a few steps as described below, depending on available data sources and
which filters are used:
A StarACS is not available, StarQuality is not available:
» Merged/final data will contain AlvariSTAR data. The MS status will be connected. Only info
available is MAC and BS ID.
» If there is no data in AlvariSTAR, final results will contain no data.
B StarACS is not available, StarQuality is available:
» Merged/final data will contain:
◊ AlvariSTAR Data - Extreme MSs
◊ StarQuality Data - 4Motion/COMPACT MSs
Only info available will be MAC and BS ID.
C StarACS is available, StarQuality is available:
1 No Advanced Filtering:
◊ AlvariSTAR Data - contains all data received from AlvariSTAR
◊ StarQuality Data - contains all data received from StarQuality
◊ StarACS Data - contains all data received from StarACS
Merged Data (final data) contains:
◊ All MSs in StarACS Data that have MACs in AlvariSTAR Data or StarQuality Data. If necessary,
BS IDs from StarACS Data are replaced with BS ID from AlvariSTAR Data (first priority) or
StarQuality Data (second priority)
◊ All MSs in StarQuality Data with MACs not in StarACS Data. (extra StarQuality MSs)
◊ All MSs in AlvariSTAR Data with MACs not in StarACS Data. (extra AlvariSTAR MSs)
AlvariSTAR User Manual 153
Chapter 6 - MS ServicesMS ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services MS Manager
2 Filter contains BS ID mask:
◊ AlvariSTAR Data - contains data from AlvariSTAR filtered by BS ID mask
◊ StarQuality Data - contains data from StarQuality filtered by BS ID mask
◊ StarACS Data - contains all data from StarACS, ignoring BS ID mask
Merged Data (final data) contains:
◊ All MSs in StarACS Data that have MACs in StarQuality Data or AlvariSTAR Data
◊ All MSs in StarQuality Data with MACs not in StarACS Data. (extra StarQuality MSs)
◊ All MSs in AlvariSTAR Data with MACs not in StarACS Data. (extra AlvariSTAR MSs)
3 Filter contains BS ID masking addition to Product Model and/or Serial Number mask:
◊ AlvariSTAR Data - contains data from AlvariSTAR filtered by BS ID mask
◊ StarQuality Data - contains data from StarQuality filtered by BS ID mask
◊ StarACS Data - contains all data from StarACS filtered by Product Model and/or Serial
Number mask
Merged Data (final data) contains all MSs in StarACS Data that have MACs in StarQuality Data
and/or AlvariSTAR Data. If necessary, BS IDs from StarACS Data are replaced with BS ID from
AlvariSTAR Data (first priority) or StarQuality Data (second priority).
4 Filter contains Product Model and/or Serial Number mask:
◊ AlvariSTAR Data - contains all data from AlvariSTAR
◊ StarQuality Data - contains all data from StarQuality
◊ StarACS Data - contains all data from StarACS filtered by Product Model and/or Serial
Number mask
Merged Data (final data) contains all MSs in StarACS Data that have MACs in StarQuality Data
and/or AlvariSTAR Data. If necessary, BS IDs from StarACS Data are replaced with BS ID from
AlvariSTAR Data (first priority) or StarQuality Data (second priority).
D StarACS is available, StarQuality is not available:
1 If there is at least 1 Extreme equipment discovered in AlvariSTAR: Data is merged like in step C)
above, with the exception that only that there is no StarQuality Data. However, if an MS in
StarACS Data has a MAC that is not in AlvariSTAR Data, but has a BS ID that is in any of the
MAC,BSID pairs that exist in AlvariSTAR Data, this MS is not added to merged/final data.
2 If there is no Extreme equipment discovered in AlvariSTAR: Merged data (final data) is the filtered
(if applicable) StarACS Data.
E For MS Rebooted Since, MS Registered Since and MS Updated Since searches: Only filtered StarACS
data is presented (no merge is made, basically ignoring StarQuality and AlvariSTAR data.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 154
Chapter 6 - MS ServicesMS ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services MS Manager
F For MSs without Lat/Long/MSs without Address searches:
» AlvariSTAR Data - contains all data received from AlvariSTAR
» StarQuality Data - contains all data received from StarQuality
» StarACS Data - contains all filtered data received from StarACS
Merged Data (final data) contains all MSs in StarACS Data that have MACs in AlvariSTAR Data or
StarQuality Data. If necessary, BS IDs from StarACS Data are replaced with BS ID from AlvariSTAR Data
(first priority) or StarQuality Data (second priority).
AlvariSTAR User Manual 155
Chapter 6 - MS ServicesThe MS Connection Maintenance ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services The MS Connection Maintenance Manager
6.2 The MS Connection Maintenance Manager
This section includes:
Introduction to the MS Connection Maintenance Manager
Retrieval of MS Data
Retrieval of All MSs Data
Single MS De-Registration
All MSs De-Registration
6.2.1 Introduction to the MS Connection Maintenance Manager
The MS Connection Maintenance Manager supports MS-Level operations related to the display of the
momentary values of a predefined set of parameters of a specific Mobile Subscriber (MS). These
parameter values can to be evaluated during operator-initiated troubleshooting. In addition, this feature
enables forced de-registration of one or multiple MSs from the network.
In the current release MS-level operations supported by the management system are targeted towards
the ASN-GW.
1 Select Managed Network > MS Connection Maintenance from the Main Menu. The MS Connection
Maintenance tab is added to the tabs ribbon and the MS Connection Maintenance Manager is
displayed.
2 In the Operation drop-down menu, select the required operation. The available options are:
» “Retrieval of MS Data” on page 157
» “Retrieval of All MSs Data” on page 158
» “Single MS De-Registration” on page 162
» “All MSs De-Registration” on page 163
INFORMATIONThe MS Connection Maintenance manager is available only if the installed Device Drivers include at least one Device Driver for a device family that support this feature. In the current release this is applicable only for 4Motion.
To open the MS Connection Maintenance Manager
AlvariSTAR User Manual 156
Chapter 6 - MS ServicesThe MS Connection Maintenance ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services The MS Connection Maintenance Manager
6.2.2 Retrieval of MS Data
The Retrieval of MS Data option is used to retrieve data related to a specific MS, as maintained by the
ASN-GW that currently serves the MS.
To retrieve data related to a specific MS, enter the ASN-GW IP Address of the ASN-GW currently serving
the MS (Bearer IP address), and the MS Outer NAI (the complete NAI, a string of up to 253 characters,
such as {am=1}[email protected]). The settings of the MS
identification data depends on getting this data from the AAA server.
Click Apply to retrieve the data for the specified MS.
‘
The displayed details include:
Figure 6-4: MS Connection Maintenance - Retrieval of MS Data - Request Details
Parameter Description
Target
ASN-GW IP Address The IP address of the target device (Bearer interface IP address).
ASN-GW BTS Number The BTS Number (Site ID) of the target device.
MS Outer NAI The Outer NAI string of the selected MS.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 157
Chapter 6 - MS ServicesThe MS Connection Maintenance ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services The MS Connection Maintenance Manager
The following buttons are now available:
6.2.3 Retrieval of All MSs Data
The Retrieval of All MSs Data option is used to retrieve general details related to all MSs served by a
specific ASN-GW, as maintained by the ASN-GW.
MS Data
MS ID (MAC Address) the MS ID (MAC address)
Serving BS ID The full ID of the serving BS.
Serving BS BTS Number The BTS Number (Site ID) of the serving device.
Associated Service Flows (per flow assigned to the MS)
SF-ID The Service Flow ID.
Mapped GRE Key The GRE Key mapped to the Service Flow.
Direction The direction of the Service Flow (Up or Down).
Assigned IP Address The assigned IP address.
Button Description
Refresh Click to refresh the displayed data.
Home Click to return to the main MS Connection Maintenance management window.
De-Register MS Click to force de-registration of the MS.
Retrieve All MSs Data Click to retrieve data for all MSs served by the same target equipment. Refer to Retrieval of All MSs Data below.
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 158
Chapter 6 - MS ServicesThe MS Connection Maintenance ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services The MS Connection Maintenance Manager
You can select the serving entity by any of the following options:
ASN-GW IP Address (the Bearer interface IP address of the target device).
ASN-GW BTS Number (the BTS Number of the target device).
NPU Management IP Address (the IP address of the interface used for managing the site (NPU) to
which the ASN-GW is assigned).
Select the option you want to use and enter the applicable value in the field next to the selected option.
Click Apply to retrieve the data for all MSs served by the specified ASN-GW.
Figure 6-5: MS Connection Maintenance - Retrieval of All MSs Data - Request Details
AlvariSTAR User Manual 159
Chapter 6 - MS ServicesThe MS Connection Maintenance ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services The MS Connection Maintenance Manager
The displayed data for all MSs served by the specified entity includes:
You can expand the displayed details for selected MSs (using the +/- expand/contract button on the left
side of each MS entry) to view also the following details for each Service Flow assigned to the MS:
Figure 6-6: MS Connection Maintenance - Retrieval of All MSs Data - Results
Parameter Description
Target
ASN-GW IP Address The IP address of the target device (Bearer interface IP address).
ASN-GW BTS Number The BTS Number (Site ID) of the target device.
MS Data (per MS served by the target device)
MS ID the MS ID (MAC address)
Serving BS ID The full ID of the serving BS.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 160
Chapter 6 - MS ServicesThe MS Connection Maintenance ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services The MS Connection Maintenance Manager
The following buttons are now available:
The displayed full details for the selected MS include:
Parameter Description
Service Flow ID The Service Flow ID
Assigned IP The assigned IP address
Button Description
Refresh Click to refresh the displayed data.
Home Click to return to the main MS Connection Maintenance management window.
Export List to CSV Click to open the Select Export Destination File, allowing you to export the All MSs Data to a CSV file in a selectable location.
De-Register All MSs Click to force de-registration of all MSs served by the selected device.
Retrieve Selected MS Full Data
Select an entry in the MS Data table and click to retrieve from the ASN-GW full details for the selected MS. See below the displayed details.
Figure 6-7: Retrieve Selected MS Full data - Results
AlvariSTAR User Manual 161
Chapter 6 - MS ServicesThe MS Connection Maintenance ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services The MS Connection Maintenance Manager
The following buttons are now available (in addition to the Refresh and Home buttons):
6.2.4 Single MS De-Registration
The Single MS De-Registration option is used to force de-registration of a specific MS.
Parameter Description
Target
ASN-GW IP Address The IP address of the target device (Bearer interface IP address).
ASN-GW BTS Number The BTS Number (Site ID) of the target device.
MS Outer NAI The Outer NAI string of the selected MS.
MS Data
MS ID (MAC Address) the MS ID (MAC address)
Serving BS ID The full ID of the serving BS.
Serving BS BTS Number The BTS Number (Site ID) of the serving device.
Associated Service Flows (per flow assigned to the MS)
SF-ID The Service Flow ID.
Mapped GRE Key The GRE Key mapped to the Service Flow.
Direction The direction of the Service Flow (Up or Down).
Assigned IP Address The assigned IP address.
Button Description
Retrieve All MSs Data Click to return to the previous screen displaying summary details for all MSs served by the selected device.
De-Register MS Click to force de-registration of the MS.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 162
Chapter 6 - MS ServicesThe MS Connection Maintenance ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services The MS Connection Maintenance Manager
To force de-registration of a specific MS, enter the ASN-GW IP Address of the ASN-GW currently serving
the MS (Bearer IP address), and the MS Outer NAI (the complete NAI, a string of up to 253 characters,
such as {am=1}[email protected]). The settings of the MS
identification data depends on getting this data from the AAA server.
Click Apply to force de-registration of the specified MS.
You can click Home to return to the main MS Connection Maintenance management window.
6.2.5 All MSs De-Registration
The All MSs De-Registration option is used to force de-registration of all MSs served by a specific device.
Figure 6-8: MS Connection Maintenance - Single MS De-Registration
AlvariSTAR User Manual 163
Chapter 6 - MS ServicesThe MS Connection Maintenance ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services The MS Connection Maintenance Manager
You can select the serving entity by:
ASN-GW IP Address (the Bearer interface IP address of the target device).
ASN-GW BTS Number (the BTS Number of the target device).
NPU Management IP Address (the IP address of the interface used for managing the site (NPU) to
which the ASN-GW is assigned).
Select the option you want to use and enter the applicable value in the field next to the selected option.
Click Apply to force de-registration of all MSs served by the specified device.
You can click Home to return to the main MS Connection Maintenance management window.
Figure 6-9: MS Connection Maintenance - All MSs De-Registration
AlvariSTAR User Manual 164
Chapter 7 - Management
In This Chapter:
“Discovery Manager” on page 166
“Data Files Manager” on page 174
“The Contacts Manager” on page 188
“The Tasks Manager” on page 194
“Preferences Manager” on page 231
Chapter 7 - ManagementDiscovery ManagerChapter 7 - Management Discovery Manager
7.1 Discovery Manager
This section includes:
Introduction to the Discovery Manager
Discovery Main Area
Discovery Details Panel
Discovery Actions Panel
Find Network Settings Panel
The Network Settings Window
7.1.1 Introduction to the Discovery Manager
The Discovery Manager enables defining IP ranges/subnets and associated SNMP communities to be
used for discovering network elements by the Network Scan task (see “Network Scan Task” on
page 210). For each IP range/subnet different discovery options may be enabled/disabled. In addition,
pre-configured Location and/or Contact may be configured to be automatically assigned to relevant
network elements upon discovery. A total of up to 65535 IPs may be defined.
Select Management > Discovery from the Main Menu. The Discovery tab is added to the tabs ribbon and
the Discovery Manager is displayed.
The Discovery Manager is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility.
To open the Discovery Manager
AlvariSTAR User Manual 166
Chapter 7 - ManagementDiscovery ManagerChapter 7 - Management Discovery Manager
7.1.2 Discovery Main Area
The Discovery grid view comprises a table that includes details on all the currently configured IP
ranges/subnets. The default sorting is by creation time, starting with the first created range/subnet.
Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.
By default, the read-only information displayed for each entry includes:
:
Figure 7-1: The Discovery Manager Table
Parameter Description
Type The type of range definition: IP Range or Subnet.
Start IP/Network The first IP address in an IP Range or the Subnet base address in a Subnet.
End IP/Mask The last IP address in an IP Range or the Subnet Mask in a Subnet.
Discovery Indicates whether periodical discovery according to parameters defined in the Network Scan task (see “Network Scan Task” on page 210) is enabled or disabled.
Auto Discovery Indicates whether Auto Discovery for the range/subnet is enabled or disabled. When enabled, Discovery will be initiated whenever a trap is received from an undiscovered device whose IP address is in the range/subnet.
Location The optional location to be assigned to discovered devices whose IP address is in the range/subnet.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 167
Chapter 7 - ManagementDiscovery ManagerChapter 7 - Management Discovery Manager
7.1.3 Discovery Details Panel
The Discovery Details section is applicable only for s single selected entry and it includes the following
tabs:
Discovery Details General Tab
Discovery Details SNMP Credentials Tab
7.1.3.1 Discovery Details General Tab
The General tab displays the same details as displayed for the selected entry in the main area. It also
includes the Contact details - the optional contact to be assigned to discovered devices whose IP address
is in the range/subnet.
SNMP Version The SNMP protocol version to be used for communication with the discovered devices. This can be either:
v1
v2c
v3
Figure 7-2: Discovery Details General Tab
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 168
Chapter 7 - ManagementDiscovery ManagerChapter 7 - Management Discovery Manager
7.1.3.2 Discovery Details SNMP Credentials Tab
The SNMP Credential tab displays the details of SNMP credentials that will be used for discovery.
(excluding passwords for SNMP version v3). For more details refer to SNMP Credentials in “The Network
Settings Window” on page 170.
7.1.4 Discovery Actions Panel
The Discovery Actions panel includes the following options:
7.1.5 Find Network Settings Panel
For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.
Figure 7-3: Discovery Details SNMP Credentials Tab (v1/v2c)
Option Action
New Opens the Network Setting window, enabling to add a new entry to the table (sse “The Network Settings Window” on page 170). Up to 65535 IPs are supported.
Edit Available only for a single selected entry. Opens the Network Setting window, enabling to edit the selected entry (sse “The Network Settings Window” on page 170).
Delete Click to delete the selected entry/entries.
Export Opens the Export Discovery Settings window, enabling to export the details of selected entries to an file (.xml) on the client’s file system. Browse to the location where the file is to be saved, specify a name for the file (the default is Discovery Settings) and click Export.
Import Opens the Import Discovery Settings window, enabling to import an existing file (.xml or .nar) of IP address ranges /subnets settings. Click to import an existing file (.xml or .nar) of IP address ranges /subnets settings. Browse to the location of the file, select the required file and click Import.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 169
Chapter 7 - ManagementDiscovery ManagerChapter 7 - Management Discovery Manager
The simple Search is performed on Start IP/Network, End IP/Mask and Location columns.
Pre-defined Filters include:
Type: Available options include only IP Range/Subnet types that are actually available in the database.
Each Type will be accompanied by the current total number of relevant instances in the database.
Discovery: The possible options are Enabled and Disabled. Only option(s) that are actually available in
the database will be available, accompanied by the current total number of relevant instances in the
database.
SNMP Version: The possible options are v1, v2c and v3. Only option(s) that are actually available in the
database will be available, accompanied by the current total number of relevant instances in the
database.
Advanced Filter includes the following criteria:
Start IP/Network
End IP/Mask
Auto Discovery
Location
7.1.6 The Network Settings Window
The Network Settings window enables creating a new discovery entry or editing an existing entry.
To create a new entry: Click on the New option in the Actions panel.
To edit an existing entry: Select the entry and click on the Edit option in the Actions panel.
To open the Network Settings window:
AlvariSTAR User Manual 170
Chapter 7 - ManagementDiscovery ManagerChapter 7 - Management Discovery Manager
The Network Settings window includes the following parameters:
:
Figure 7-4: The Network Settings Window
Parameter Description
Type The type of range definition: IP Range or Subnet. Select from the drop-down menu whether to define the range using IP Range (the first and last address in the range) or Subnet (Network and Mask). The default for a new entry is IP Range.
Start IP/Network The first IP address in an IP Range or the Subnet base address in a Subnet.
End IP/Mask The last IP address in an IP Range or the Subnet Mask in a Subnet.
To minimize unnecessary traffic load in the network, avoid defining IP address ranges that include too many “gaps”, e.g., non existing addresses.
Discovery Defines whether periodical discovery according to parameters defined in the Network Scan task (see “Network Scan Task” on page 210) is enabled (selected) or disabled. The default for a new entry is enabled (selected).
AlvariSTAR User Manual 171
Chapter 7 - ManagementDiscovery ManagerChapter 7 - Management Discovery Manager
Auto Discovery Defines whether Auto Discovery for the range/subnet is enabled (selected) or disabled. When enabled, Discovery will be initiated whenever a trap is received from an undiscovered device whose IP address is in the range/subnet. The default for a new entry is disabled (de-selected)
Location The optional location to be assigned to newly discovered devices whose IP address is in the range/subnet. Click on the Open Selector button to open the Select location window allowing you to select a pre-configured location. For details refer to “The Select location Window” on page 103.
Contact The optional contact to be assigned to newly discovered devices whose IP address is in the range/subnet. Click on the Open Selector button to open the Select contact window allowing you to select a pre-configured contact. For details refer to “The Select contact Window” on page 193.
SNMP Version The SNMP protocol version to be used for communication with the discovered devices. This can be either:
v1
v2c
v3
All products supported by the current release support version v2c. However, you may define either v1 or v2c - the management system will identify and use the correct version (v2c).
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 172
Chapter 7 - ManagementDiscovery ManagerChapter 7 - Management Discovery Manager
SNMP Credentials Use the Add and Remove buttons to populate the SNMP Credentials. At least one set of credentials must be defined. The type of credentials differ, depending on the SNMP version.
For SNMP v1 and v2c, fill in the read/write community table:
Read Community - SNMP Read community to be used by discovery when accessing devices in the range.
Write Community - The SNMP Write community to be used when accessing discovered devices in the range.
For SNMP v3, the following credentials apply:
Username - Username used for authentication
Security Level - Authentication and privacy settings
» NoAuth_NoPriv - Both authentication and privacy are disabled
» Auth_NoPriv - Authentication is enabled and privacy is disabled
» Auth_Priv - Both authentication and privacy are enabled
Authentication Algorithm - Hashing algorithm applied to the authentication password
» MD5 - Message-Digest algorithm 5
» SHA - Secure Hash Algorithm
Authentication Password - Password used for authentication. At least 8 printable characters. For security reasons the password is displayed as a string of *.
Privacy Algorithm - Encryption standard used for data transmission
» AES - Uses the Advanced Encryption Standard
» DES - Uses the Data Encryption Standard
Privacy Password - Encryption key used by the privacy algorithm. At least 8 printable characters. For security reasons the password is displayed as a string of *.
INFORMATION The Discovery process is based on the defined Read community. All future device management actions will use the defined Write community. If a wrong Write community was defined, the device will be discovered and displayed, but its status will be “Unknown” and it will not be possible to manage it. The same is true for cases where the Write community in the device was changed (not via the management system) after being discovered. In this case, device must be deleted from the database (see the Delete action in “Equipment Actions Panel” on page 43) and re-discovered using the updated Write community.
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 173
Chapter 7 - ManagementData Files ManagerChapter 7 - Management Data Files Manager
7.2 Data Files Manager
This section includes:
Introduction to the Data Files Manager
Data Files Main Area
Data Files Actions Panel
Find Data Files Panel
Select File Type Window
Multiple Restore Task
Using the Mass Configuration Wizard
The Data File Selector Window
7.2.1 Introduction to the Data Files Manager
The File Manager enables managing different types of files stored in the database. It also enables
importing certain file types to the database, exporting files to either the client file system or the server
file system, and initiating certain tasks using the files stored in the database.
Select Management > Data Files from the Main Menu. The Data Files tab is added to the tabs ribbon and
the Data Files Manager is displayed.
To open the Data Files Manager
AlvariSTAR User Manual 174
Chapter 7 - ManagementData Files ManagerChapter 7 - Management Data Files Manager
7.2.2 Data Files Main Area
The Data Files grid view comprises a table that includes details on all the data files currently stored in the
database. The default sorting is according to the time at which the file was added to the database, in
ascending order.
Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.
By default, the read-only information displayed for each entry includes:
:
Figure 7-5: The Data Files Table
Parameter Description
Name The name of the file. Typically, the name includes by default the data and time at which the file was created by the source device, using the real time clock of the source device. For more details refer to the File Manager section in the applicable Device Driver manual.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 175
Chapter 7 - ManagementData Files ManagerChapter 7 - Management Data Files Manager
Category The general category of the file. Available Categories are:
Configuration
Performance
Logging
Firmware
Type The specific type of the file. The currently possible file types are:
COMPACT/4Motion:
» COMPACT/4M backup Current Configuration (Configuration Category)
» COMPACT/4M backup Older Configuration (Configuration Category)
» COMPACT/4M Offline Configuration (Configuration Category)
» 4M backup Logging (Logging Category)
» COMPACT/4M Performance (Performance Category)
» COMPACT/4M Vendor Configuration (Configuration Category)
Extreme:
» Extreme Full Config (Configuration Category)
» Extreme SP and MSF (Configuration Category)
» Extreme MS Inventory (Configuration Category)
» Extreme Event Log (Configuration Category)
» Extreme Country Codes (Firmware Category)
» Extreme FRU Heads (Firmware Category)
» Extreme License (Firmware Category)
Status The status of the file:
Normal: A file created by a task initiated by the management system (Backup or Performance Collection tasks initiated from either the Equipment Manager or the Tasks Manager).
Orphan: A backup file for a device that was removed from the database or a device for which the relevant identification details were changed using the management system.
Imported: An imported file.
Equipment Type The relevant device type.
Equipment Name The name of the relevant device.
Equipment Address The management IP address of the relevant device.
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 176
Chapter 7 - ManagementData Files ManagerChapter 7 - Management Data Files Manager
COMPACT and 4Motion backup files and Extreme Configuration files are generated using a Backup
task. For details refer to the Backup Task section in the relevant Device Driver Manual. They may also be
imported.
COMPACT and 4Motion Offline Configuration files are generated using the Mass Configuration Wizard
(see “Using the Mass Configuration Wizard” on page 181). They may also be imported.
Vendor Configuration file (applicable for COMPACT and 4Motion): A vendor configuration file includes
vendor parameters that cannot be configured by the configuration tools available to the customer. If for
any reason the vendor will decide that any of these parameters should be modified, or if they should be
modified to meet specific requirements, a special file that includes the necessary modifications will be
prepared by the vendor and will be sent to the relevant customer(s). A Vendor Configuration file should
be imported to the Data Files database and loaded to relevant devices using the Restore task.
License file (applicable for Extreme): A License file enables modifying some capabilities such as the
maximum number of MSs that can be served (for more details refer to the BTS Licensing Properties Tab
in the Extreme Device Driver Manual). To modify one or several of the relevant capabilities, a License file
should be acquired from the vendor. The License file include licenses for specific devices. A License file
should be imported to the Data Files database and loaded to relevant devices using the Restore task.
Country Codes file (applicable for Extreme): The Country Codes file include parameters (including
parameters affected by relevant local regulation) on all frequency bands that may be used by Extreme
devices (for more details refer to the Sector Radio Band Capabilities Tab in the Extreme Device Driver
Manual). Should there be any need to update this file without loading a new SW version, the vendor will
make required changed and will send the modified file to relevant customers. A Country Codes file
should be imported to the Data Files database and loaded to relevant devices using the Restore task.
RFU Heads file (applicable for Extreme): The RFU Heads file include certain parameters of all that may be
used by Extreme devices. Should there be any need to update this file without loading a new SW
version, the vendor will make required changed and will send the modified file to relevant customers. A
RFU Heads file should be imported to the Data Files database and loaded to relevant devices using the
Restore task.
7.2.3 Data Files Actions Panel
The Data Files Actions panel includes the following options:
Date The date and time at which the file was added to the database of the management system.
Option Action
Delete Deletes the selected file(s) from the database.
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 177
Chapter 7 - ManagementData Files ManagerChapter 7 - Management Data Files Manager
Export Exports the selected file(s) to the client file-system.
For a single COMPACT or 4Motion file, or any combination of multiple selected files that include at least one COMPACT or 4Motion file, opens the Select a directory for export window, allowing to browse to the desired location on the client file-system. Click Select to complete the Export to the selected folder (you may use the Make New Folder option to create a new target file in desired location).
For a single Extreme file, opens the Save window, allowing to browse to the desired location on the client file-system (you may right-click on a folder and select the New Folder option to create a new target file in desired location). The default name for the file to be saved in indicated in the File Name text box, allowing you to enter a new name for the file to be saved. Click Save to complete the export.
For any combination of multiple selected files that include at least one Extremefile, the Export action is not applicable.
Import Imports a file from the client file-system to the Data Files database. Click to open the Select File Type window (see “Select File Type Window” on page 179) and select the required file type. The default is Generic File which means any relevant file. Click Ok to open the Import File window, browse to the location on the client file-system where the file is stored, select the file and click Import. A files that does not match the selection criteria defined in the Select File Type window or cannot be validated will not be imported.
Export to Server Exports the selected file(s) to the server file system. The files will be saved in the <Disk_Drive>/AlvariSTAR/filesystem directory.
Mass Configuration
Available only if a 4Motion Device Driver is installed. Applicable only for a single selected backup configuration file. Opens the Mass Configuration Wizard, enabling generation of offline configuration files based on the selected backup file. For details refer to “Using the Mass Configuration Wizard” on page 181.
Restore For a a single selected file, excluding 4M backup Logging, COMPACT/4M Performance, Extreme MS Inventory, and Extreme Event Log files, opens a Restore task enabling to load the selected file to target device(s). For details refer to the Restore Task section in the relevant Device Driver manual.
For multiple selected files of one of the following types, opens the Multiple Restore task (see “Multiple Restore Task” on page 180), enabling to initiate multiple tasks for loading the selected files to relevant target devices.
COMPACT Backup files
COMPACT Offline Configuration files
4Motion Backup files
4Motion Offline Configuration files
Option Action
AlvariSTAR User Manual 178
Chapter 7 - ManagementData Files ManagerChapter 7 - Management Data Files Manager
7.2.4 Find Data Files Panel
For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Using the Grid View” on
page 18.
The simple Search is performed on File Name, Equipment Name, and Equipment Address columns.
Pre-defined Filters include:
Category: Available options include only file categories that are actually available in the database.
Each category will be accompanied by the current total number of relevant instances in the database.
Type: Available options include only file types that are actually available in the database. Each file type
will be accompanied by the current total number of relevant instances in the database.
Equipment Types: Available options include only equipment types that are actually available in the
database. Each equipment type will be accompanied by the current total number of relevant
instances in the database.
Advanced Filter includes the following criteria:
Name
Status
Equipment Name
Equipment Address
Date
7.2.5 Select File Type Window
To open the Select File Type window, click on the Import option:
Select one of the options in the Import File As drop-down list:
Figure 7-6: Select File Type Window
AlvariSTAR User Manual 179
Chapter 7 - ManagementData Files ManagerChapter 7 - Management Data Files Manager
Click OK to close the Select File Type window and open the Import File window.
7.2.6 Multiple Restore Task
The Multiple Restore task enables initiating multiple configuration tasks for loading selected
configuration files to the target devices. The configuration files can be:
COMPACT Backup files
COMPACT Offline Configuration files
4Motion Backup files
4Motion Offline Configuration files
Option Description
Generic File (the default) The Import File window will enable selecting a file of any of the following types:
.gz: Applicable for all files originally created in 4Motion or COMPACT devices (Backup or Performance Collection) or Offline Configuration files for these devices.
.res: Applicable for Extreme backup files.
.sig: Applicable for Extreme Country Codes or RFU Heads files.
.lic: Applicable for Extreme License files.
.xml: Applicable for Vendor Configuration files.
4M BTS File The Import File window will enable selecting a .gz file. This option is applicable only for files originally created in 4Motion devices (Backup or Performance Collection).
4M Offline Configuration File
The Import File window will enable selecting a .gz file. This option is applicable only for 4M Offline Configuration File.
Extreme BTS File The Import File window will enable selecting a .res file. This option is applicable only for files originally created in Extreme devices (Backup).
COMPACT BTS File The Import File window will enable selecting a .gz file. This option is applicable only for files originally created in COMPACT devices (Backup or Performance Collection).
COMPACT Offline Configuration File
The Import File window will enable selecting a .gz file. This option is applicable only for COMPACT Offline Configuration File.
The Multiple Restore Task is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 180
Chapter 7 - ManagementData Files ManagerChapter 7 - Management Data Files Manager
In the Data Files Manager select the required multiple files (all files must be of the same type) and click
on the Restore option. The Multiple Restore Task editor is displayed:
The Multiple Restore Task editor includes the following options:
Click OK to initiate the restore tasks (if Run the tasks now option was selected) or to create all the tasks
and add them to the Tasks Manager ((if Run the tasks now option was not selected).
The default name for each task includes the task’s type, the date and time at which the task was created,
and an auto-sequential task number: restore_task_<yyyymmddhhmmss>_<n>.
7.2.7 Using the Mass Configuration Wizard
To open the Multiple Restore Task Editor:
Figure 7-7: Multiple Restore Task Editor
Option Description
Auto Reset Select to automatically reset each target device for applying the new configuration after successful completion of the Restore task for the relevant device. The default is not selected (no automatic reset).
Run the tasks now Select to run the tasks immediately after clicking the OK button. If not selected, all tasks will be created and added to the Tasks Manager as regular Restore Configuration tasks.
Delete the successful tasks Select to delete the successfully completed tasks from the Tasks Manager’s window. Only tasks that were not completed successfully will remain in the Tasks Manager. If not selected, all tasks will remain in the Tasks Manager. The default is not selected (all tasks will remain).
INFORMATION The Mass Configuration Wizard is available only if the installed Device Drivers include one or more Device Driver(s) for device families that support this feature (COMPACT and 4Motion).
By default the Mass Configuration Wizard can be used to create a single offline configuration file, using an Excel file containing specific configuration details for a single new site. To simultaneously create multiple offline configuration files for two or more new sites a suitable license is required.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 181
Chapter 7 - ManagementData Files ManagerChapter 7 - Management Data Files Manager
The Mass Configuration Wizard offers a simple process for creating multiple site configuration files.
This section includes:
Starting the Mass Configuration Wizard
Mass Configuration Wizard - Common Parameters
Mass Configuration Wizard - Import Unique Parameters File
Mass Configuration Wizard - Merge File
Mass Configuration Wizard - Summary
7.2.7.1 Starting the Mass Configuration Wizard
For a backup file based Mass Configuration Wizard (applicable for 4Motion backup configuration
files): In the File Manager, select the backup configuration file to be used as the “golden” file,
right-click and select the Mass Configuration option to open the Mass Configuration Wizard,
displaying the name of the selected backup file.
For a Project file based Mass Configuration Wizard ((applicable for COMPACT): In the Configuration
Operations menu select the Offline Project Configuration option to open the Offline Project
Configuration manager. In the Offline Project Configuration manager select the Multi Site Project to
be used as the basis for preparing configuration files and select the Mass Configuration option to
open the Mass Configuration Wizard, displaying the name of the selected Project.
To start the Mass Configuration Wizard
INFORMATION
The per-site Unique Parameters Excel file to be used by the wizard for generating configuration files should be prepared and be available in the client file system prior to initiating the wizard.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 182
Chapter 7 - ManagementData Files ManagerChapter 7 - Management Data Files Manager
7.2.7.2 Mass Configuration Wizard - Common Parameters
The name of the Project/Backup file to be used as the common parameters file for the wizard is
displayed.
Click Next to load the selected common parameters file.
7.2.7.3 Mass Configuration Wizard - Import Unique Parameters File
Figure 7-8: Mass Configuration Wizard - Common Parameters
Figure 7-9: Mass Configuration Wizard - Import Unique Parameters File
AlvariSTAR User Manual 183
Chapter 7 - ManagementData Files ManagerChapter 7 - Management Data Files Manager
1 Use the Select File button to open the Open window, allowing you to browse to the location of the
pre-prepared Excel file. For a Project based Common Parameters file the default Unique Parameters
File is the one created when preparing the project. Select the required Excel file and click Open.
2 Click Next. If the general configuration structure (such as number of BSs defined for each site) in the
Excel file does not match the general configuration structure of the selected common parameters
project/backup file, an error message indicating the mismatch will be displayed.
3 If there are any detectable configuration errors in the file (such as if a parameter that should be
unique appears more than once or a non-valid value) an Invalid Unique Parameters window will be
displayed, indicating the detected errors.
The next step will become available only if a usable Excel file is selected.
Figure 7-10: Mass Configuration Wizard - Invalid Unique Parameters
AlvariSTAR User Manual 184
Chapter 7 - ManagementData Files ManagerChapter 7 - Management Data Files Manager
7.2.7.4 Mass Configuration Wizard - Merge File
A table displaying the main identification parameters of the new sites will be displayed. Click Next to
generate the configuration files for the listed sites. If there are any consistency problems a Consistency
Rules Issues window will open, indicating the detected problems.
New configuration files can be generated only if there are no consistency rules issues for all sites defined
in the Excel file. If there are any consistency rules issues, a message indicating the problem will be
displayed. The wizard should be restarted after correcting all consistency rules issues.
Figure 7-11: Mass Configuration Wizard - Merge File
AlvariSTAR User Manual 185
Chapter 7 - ManagementData Files ManagerChapter 7 - Management Data Files Manager
7.2.7.5 Mass Configuration Wizard - Summary
If there were no consistency rules issues, all the required configuration files can be generated. The
Summary window displays the main details of the files that will be generated. For each site whose
specific configuration details are provided in the Excel file, the Mass Configuration Wizard will generate
a validated and signed XML configuration file to be used during installation.
Figure 7-12: Mass Configuration Wizard - Consistency Rules Issues
Figure 7-13: Mass Configuration Wizard - Summary
AlvariSTAR User Manual 186
Chapter 7 - ManagementData Files ManagerChapter 7 - Management Data Files Manager
Click Finish to generate the files and save them as Offline Configuration files. Each file includes all
parameters configured when preparing the Project, the per-site unique parameters from the Excel file,
and relevant automatically calculated parameter. All other parameters will be provided with their default
values.
After discovery of new device(s) by the management system, you can use the Multiple Restore task (see
“Multiple Restore Task” on page 180) to load a the suitable offline configuration file(s) to the relevant
device(s). Association of a configuration file to a target device is based on the Management IP Address.
7.2.8 The Data File Selector Window
The Data File Selector window is opened whenever there is a need to select a file for a restore task.
You may use the Find Data File panel to search for data file(s) that meet specific criteria.
Select a single file and click Apply to return to the relevant task.
Figure 7-14: Data File Selector
AlvariSTAR User Manual 187
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Contacts ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Contacts Manager
7.3 The Contacts Manager
This section includes:
Introduction to the Contacts Manager
Contacts Main Area
Contact Details Panel
Contacts Actions Panel
Find Contacts Panel
Contact Editor
The Select contact Window
7.3.1 Introduction to the Contacts Manager
The Contacts Manager enables managing contacts for managed devices. Each device can be associated
with a contact, which is typically the person responsible for the device that should be contacted
whenever there is any problem associated with it.
Note that the contact assigned to a device by the management system may differ from the contact
parameter configured in the device.
To associate either a single device with a contact or several devices with the same contact, use the Edit
Connectivity action in the Equipment Manager (see “The Network Element Editor” on page 50 and
“The Common attributes Editor” on page 54).
You may also simplify the contacts assignment process by specifying contacts in the discovery definitions
(see “Discovery Manager” on page 166 and “Discovery Task” on page 219).
Select Management > Contacts from the Main Menu. The Contacts tab is added to the tabs ribbon and
the Contacts Manager is displayed.
To open the Contacts Manager:
AlvariSTAR User Manual 188
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Contacts ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Contacts Manager
7.3.2 Contacts Main Area
The Contacts grid view comprises a table that includes details on all the currently configured Contacts.
Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.
By default, the read-only information displayed for each entry includes:
:
Figure 7-15: Contacts Table
Parameter Description
Contact Icon An icon indicating whether the contact is a single person ( ) or a group ( ).
Contact id A unique identifier for the contact.
First Name Optional. The contact’s first name.
Last Name Optional. The contact’s last name.
Company Optional. The contact’s company name.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 189
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Contacts ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Contacts Manager
7.3.3 Contact Details Panel
The read-only information available in the Contact Details section for a single selected contact includes:
Contact id
First Name
Last Name
Company
Contact icon
Address
Phone number
Mobile number
Fax number
For details on these parameters refer to “Contact Editor” on page 191.
For multiple selected Contacts no details are displayed.
7.3.4 Contacts Actions Panel
The Contact Actions panel includes the following options:
Figure 7-16: Contacts Details
Option Action
New Opens the Contact editor window, allowing definition of a new contact. See “Contact Editor” on page 191 for details.
Edit Available only for a single selected contact. Opens the Contact editor window with the current configuration of the selected contact, enabling to modify the configuration. See “Contact Editor” on page 191 for details.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 190
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Contacts ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Contacts Manager
7.3.5 Find Contacts Panel
For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.
The simple Search and Pre-Defined Filters options are not available for contacts.
Advanced Filter includes the following criteria:
Contact id
First Name
Last Name
Company
7.3.6 Contact Editor
The Contact Editor enables creating a new contact or modifying details of an existing location.
1 In the Actions panel:
» Click on New to create a new contact, or
» Select a contact and click on Edit to modify the selected contact.
Delete Enables to delete the selected contact(s) from the database. If a contact is associated with equipment or specified in any discovery task it cannot be deleted.
To create/modify a contact:
Option Action
AlvariSTAR User Manual 191
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Contacts ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Contacts Manager
2 Type in or modify the Contact Editor fields as required:
3 Click OK.
Figure 7-17: Contact Editor
Parameter Description
Contact id A unique identifier for this contact. Up to 80 printable characters.
First Name Optional. The contact’s first name. Up to 80 printable characters.
Last Name Optional. The contact’s last name. Up to 80 printable characters.
Company Optional. The contact’s company name. Up to 80 printable characters.
Contact icon Optional. Select from the drop-down list an icon to represent this contact: Contact for a single contact person or Group.
Address Optional. The contact’s address. Up to 80 printable characters.
Phone Number Optional. The contact’s phone number. Up to 80 numbers (only number are allowed).
Mobile Number Optional. The contact’s mobile number. Up to 80 numbers (only number are allowed).
Email Optional. The contact’s e-mail address. Up to 80 printable characters. Must be in an e-mail address format.
Fax Number Optional. The contact’s fax number. Up to 80 numbers (only number are allowed).
AlvariSTAR User Manual 192
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Contacts ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Contacts Manager
7.3.7 The Select contact Window
The Select contact window is opened whenever there is a need to assign a contact to one or several
specific entities, such as when creating/editing a Network Settings entry in the Discovery Manager or
when using the Edit Connectivity action in the Equipment Manager for updating the parameters of one
or several devices.
contacts are displayed as in the Contacts Manager main area.
You can use the Advanced Filtering option to search for contact(s) that meet certain criteria.
Select a single contact and click Apply to assign the contact to the relevant entity/entities.
Figure 7-18: Select contact
AlvariSTAR User Manual 193
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
7.4 The Tasks Manager
This section includes:
Introduction to the Tasks Manager
Tasks Main Area
Task Details Panel
Tasks Actions Panel
Find Tasks Panel
Task Types
The Task Editor’s Controls and Indicators
The Task Scheduler
The Runtime Results Window
The Task Report Window
The Task Results Window
Previously Run Task (Task Rerun)
Network Scan Task
Database Aging Tasks
LDAP Backup/File Aging Task
Configuration History Backup and Aging Task
File Data Aging Tasks
Mutual Neighboring Task
Discovery Task
Multiple Configuration Task
7.4.1 Introduction to the Tasks Manager
Tasks are operations that are performed on one or several system entities such as managed devices or
general operations performed by the network management system. They run in the background,
allowing the users of the network management system to continue managing the network while they
run. After a task has completed, or upon termination of a task, a report is issued.
The Tasks Manager displays information on existing tasks and enables editing, scheduling, running or
deleting existing tasks.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 194
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
Select Management > Tasks from the Main Menu. The Tasks tab is added to the tabs ribbon and the
Tasks Manager is displayed
7.4.2 Tasks Main Area
The Tasks grid view comprises a table that includes details on all the currently existing Tasks.
Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.
By default, the read-only information displayed for each entry includes:
:
To open the Tasks Manager:
Figure 7-19: The Tasks Table
Parameter Description
Name The task’s name.
Created By The name of the user that created the task or SYSTEM for tasks created by the network management system.
Modified By The name of the last user that modified the task.
Volatile A volatile task is not saved in the database. It can be run only once and it will be displayed in the Task Manager (with Volatile status Yes) only for a short time. This is applicable only for certain tasks that are not initiated from the Task Manager.
Type The type of task. See details in “Task Types” on page 200.
State The current state of the task: Active, Inactive, Waiting, Stopping.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 195
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
7.4.3 Task Details Panel
The read-only information available in the Task Details section for a single selected task includes the
following tabs:
Tasks Details Basic Tab
Tasks Details Results Tab
7.4.3.1 Tasks Details Basic Tab
The following details are available in the Basic tab:
Name
Description (if available)
Category (type)
Created By
Last Run The date and time the last time the task was run (or null if was never run).
Last Run Result The result of the task’s last run: Completed/Completed with errors/Aborted/Never run.
Next Run The next date and time at which the task is scheduled to run, or null if not scheduled.
Figure 7-20: Tasks Details Basic Tab
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 196
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
7.4.3.2 Tasks Details Results Tab
The Results tab presents the time-line and results for all instances of the relevant task in a certain period.
All instances are presented in a single row. A slide selector enables selecting one of the following values
for the displayed time window size:
1 Day
2 Days (default)
5 Days
7 Days
Horizontal scroll mechanism using left & right arrows enables shifting the displayed information to
desired dates. By default the center of the window is the current date and time.
Task instances are colored as follows:
A single successful instance: Green
A single partially successful instance (e.g. SW Upgrade task-instance for multiple devices, in which the
task ended successfully for some devices and failed for other devices: Yellow
A single failed instance: Red
Multiple instances with the same result: The same color as for a single instance.
Multiple instances with different results: Striped with Green, Yellow and Red.
A future (scheduled) instances - Blue
A special icon indicates overlapping task instance (due to currently-used zoom level).
A single-task instance information shall be presented in a bubble upon mouse hovering over the specific
instance. This information shall include:
Task Category (type)
Figure 7-21: Tasks Details Results Tab
AlvariSTAR User Manual 197
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
Task Name
Date & time
Result
7.4.4 Tasks Actions Panel
The Tasks Actions panel includes the following options:
Option Action
New Opens the Task wizard, allowing definition of a new task. In the current release this is applicable only for a Discovery task (see“Discovery Task” on page 219). All other new tasks are created from the relevant Manager.
Edit Available only for a single selected task. For an inactive task, opens the task editor window for the selected task, enabling to modify the task’s parameters. For a currently running task, opens the Runtime Results window (see “The Runtime Results Window” on page 205) enabling to see runtime results for the task.
Delete Delete the selected task(s) from the database. Not available for active tasks and for system tasks (Created By is SYSTEM).
Scheduled tasks cannot be deleted. To delete a scheduled task, you need to first unschedule it (see below).
Run Manually executes the task. While the task is running, the state changes from Inactive to Active. The option is unavailable for currently running tasks. If there are more than 20 active tasks, the state of some of the tasks may change from Inactive to Waiting.
When attempting to run a task which affects equipment that is not part of the user’s visibility domain, a meaningful message will be displayed in the task report.
Upon selecting the Run option for a previously executed Software Upgrade task that was completed with errors, the Previously Run Task window (See “Previously Run Task (Task Rerun)” on page 209) will open, enabling selection of actions for the next run of the task.
Abort Aborts the selected running task. Available for running tasks only (State is Active or Waiting). Upon selecting the Abort option, a confirmation message is displayed. Click Yes to abort the task. The task’s State changes to Inactive (in some cases it may temporarily change to Stopping), and the Last Run Result to Aborted.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 198
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
7.4.5 Find Tasks Panel
For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.
The simple Search is performed on File Name, Created By, and Modified By columns.
Pre-defined Filters include:
Volatile: Available options include only volatility status that are actually available in the database. Each
option will be accompanied by the current total number of relevant instances in the database.
State: Available options include only task states that are actually available in the database. Each task
state will be accompanied by the current total number of relevant instances in the database.
Last Run Results: Available options include only last run result options that are actually available in the
database. Each result option will be accompanied by the current total number of relevant instances in
the database.
Advanced Filter includes the following criteria:
Name
Created By
Modified By
Last Run
Next Run
Schedule Opens the Schedule Editor (See “The Task Scheduler” on page 203), enabling to schedule future activation(s) of the task (or change the scheduling of a previously scheduled task). Not available for currently running tasks.
Unschedule Clears the configured scheduling for the selected task. Available only for scheduled tasks.
Report Not available for tasks that were never run. For a completed task opens the Task Report window (See “The Task Report Window” on page 206), enabling to view a report of the last execution of the selected task. For a currently running tasks opens the Run Time Results window ((See “The Runtime Results Window” on page 205).
History Opens the Task Results window (See “The Task Results Window” on page 208), displaying a list of all past activations of the selected task and their results. You may select a specific instance and view its detailed report.
Not available for tasks that were never run.
Option Action
AlvariSTAR User Manual 199
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
7.4.6 Task Types
Possibly task types include:
SYSTEM tasks: These are pre-defined tasks created automatically by the network management system
(Created BY is SYSTEM) according to the installed Device Drivers. SYSTEM tasks cannot be deleted.
The list of possible SYSTEM tasks include:
» Network Scan: Task type is Network Discovery. Not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility. For
details refer to “Network Scan Task” on page 210.
» Audit Log DAP: Task type is Database Aging. For details refer to “Database Aging Tasks” on
page 211.
» Event History DAP: Task type is Database Aging. For details refer to “Database Aging Tasks” on
page 211.
» LDAP Backup/File Aging: Task type is LDAP Backup/File Aging. For details refer to “LDAP
Backup/File Aging Task” on page 213.
» COMPACT File Data Aging: Task type is COMPACT File Data Aging. Available only if a COMPACT
Device Driver is installed. For details refer to “File Data Aging Tasks” on page 214.
» 4M File Data Aging: Task type is 4M File Data Aging. Available only if a 4Motion Device Driver is
installed. For details refer to“File Data Aging Tasks” on page 214.
» Configuration History Backup and Aging Task: Task type is Configuration History Aging. Available
only if installed Device Driver(s) include COMPACT and/or 4Motion Device Driver(s). For details
refer to“Configuration History Backup and Aging Task” on page 213.
» Mutual Neighboring: Task type is Mutual Neighboring. Available only if installed Device Driver(s)
include COMPACT and/or 4Motion Device Driver(s). Not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility. For
details refer to“Mutual Neighboring Task” on page 215.
Tasks created by users:
» Discovery Task: A new task can be created from the Tasks Manager using the New action. Not
applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility. For details refer to “Discovery Task” on page 219.
» Multiple Configuration: A new task can be created from either the Equipment Manager using the
Multiple Configuration action or in the Configuration Templates Manager using the Apply action.
Not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility. For details refer to “Multiple Configuration Task” on
page 225.
» 4M Backup Configuration: Available only if a 4Motion Device Driver is installed. A new task can
be created in the Equipment Manager using the Backup action. For details refer to the Backup
Configuration Task section in the relevant Device Driver Manual.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 200
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
» COMPACT Backup Configuration: Available only if a COMPACT Device Driver is installed. A new
task can be created from the Equipment Manager using the Backup action. For details refer to the
Backup Configuration Task section in the relevant Device Driver Manual.
» Extreme Configuration Backup: Available only if an Extreme Device Driver is installed. A new task
can be created from the Equipment Manager using the Backup action. For details refer to the
Configuration Backup Task section in the relevant Device Driver Manual.
» COMPACT Performance Collection: Available only if ia COMPACT Device Driver is installed. A new
task can be created from the Equipment Manager using the Collect Performance Data action. Not
applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility. For details refer to the Performance Collection Task section
in the relevant Device Driver Manual.
» 4M Performance Collection: Available only if a 4Motion Device Driver is installed. A new task can
be created from the Equipment Manager using the Collect Performance Data action. Not
applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility. For details refer to the Performance Collection Task section
in the relevant Device Driver Manual.
» COMPACT Restore Configuration: Available only if a COMPACT Device Driver is installed. A new
task can be created from either the Equipment Manager or Data Files Manager using the Restore
action. For details refer to the Restore Task section in the relevant Device Driver Manual.
» 4M Restore Configuration: Available only if a 4Motion Device Driver is installed. A new task can
be created from either the Equipment Manager or Data Files Manager using the Restore action.
For details refer to the Restore Task section in the relevant Device Driver Manual.
» Extreme Configuration Restore: Available only if a Extreme Device Driver is installed. A new task
can be created from either the Equipment Manager or Data Files Manager using the Restore
action. For details refer to the Restore Task section in the relevant Device Driver Manual.
» COMPACT/4M/Extreme Software Upgrade: A new task can be created from the Equipment
Manager using the SW Upgrade action. For details refer to the Software Upgrade Task section in
the relevant Device Driver Manual.
» CLI Task: Available only if a 4Motion Device Driver is installed. A new task can be created from the
Equipment Manager using the Run CLI Scripts action. For details refer to the CLI Task section in
the relevant Device Driver Manual.
» Geolocation and Bing Tasks: New tasks can be created from the Preferences manager using the
MS Coordinates Import feature. For details refer to “The Geolocation and Bing Tasks” on
page 242.
7.4.7 The Task Editor’s Controls and Indicators
To open the Task Editor for an existing task:
AlvariSTAR User Manual 201
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
In the Task Manager window, select a single task and click on the Edit action.
In the relevant manager, select one or several entities (according to specific limitations) and click on the
relevant action.
The parameters/functionality of a Task Editor depend on the specific task.
The following general controls and indicators are available at the bottom of all task editors:
To open the Task Editor for a new task:
Figure 7-22: The Task Editor’s Controls and Indicators
Click To:
OK button For an existing task: Save any changes and closes the task window.
For a new task: Save the task and its parameters.in the Tasks database
Cancel button For an existing task: Close the task window without saving changes.
For a new task: Close the task window without saving the task
Run Execute the task. Not available for a currently Active task. While the task is running, the state changes from Inactive to Active. If there are more than 20 active tasks, the state of some of the tasks may change from Inactive to Waiting.
When attempting to run a task which affects equipment that is not part of the user’s visibility domain, a meaningful message will be displayed in the task report.
Upon selecting the Run option for a previously executed Software Upgrade task that was completed with errors, the Previously Run Task window (See “Previously Run Task (Task Rerun)” on page 209) will open, enabling selection of actions for the next run of the task.
Abort Stop the task. Available only for a currently running task (State is Active or Waiting). A confirmation message is displayed. Click Yes to abort the task. The task’s State changes to Inactive (in some cases it may temporarily change to Stopping), and the Last Run Result to Aborted.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 202
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
The task’s State and Last Run Results are also displayed.
7.4.8 The Task Scheduler
Tasks can be scheduled to run either once at a predefined date and time, or several times at a predefined
recurrence interval. Several SYSTEM tasks (LDAP/Backup File Aging, Event History DAP, Audit Log DAP,
Configuration History Backup and Aging Task) are defined by default with a never ending recurrence.
In the Task Manager, select the task and click on Schedule to open the Schedule window. Alternatively,
you can schedule a task during task creation, or while editing a task, by clicking on the Scheduler icon at
the bottom of the task window. The Schedule Editor opens:
View Report Not applicable for a task that was never run. For a completed task opens the task report for last run results (see “The Task Report Window” on page 206). For a currently Active task opens the Run Time Results window (see “The Runtime Results Window” on page 205).
Schedule Open the Schedule Editor (See “The Task Scheduler” on page 203), enabling to schedule future activation(s) of the task (or change the scheduling of a previously scheduled task). Not available for currently running tasks.
Help Open the On Line Help for the task
To schedule a task:
Click To:
AlvariSTAR User Manual 203
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
The Schedule Editor includes the following parameters:
Figure 7-23: Schedule Editor
Parameter Description
Start The start time for the task. Select one of the following options:
Now (the default)
On - The default activation date is the current date, meaning now. Specify a different date using one of the following options:
» Enter required date directly in the text field (or edit required components of current date), in the proper format (by default: MM/DD/YY).
» Click the down arrow on the right side of the field and select a date from the calendar graphic display.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 204
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
4 Set the Start and End time and optionally select a recurrence interval.
5 Click OK to apply the schedule for the selected task.
7.4.9 The Runtime Results Window
The Runtime Results window provides runtime results for a currently active task.
Recurrence Set the recurrence interval between each task execution. Available intervals include:
None - no recurrence (default)
Minutely - specify the number of minutes. (the range is 1-1,440)
Hourly - specify the number of hours. (the range is 1-96).
Daily - specify the number of days. (the range is 1-60)
Weekly - select one of the following options:
» Recur every - enter the number of weeks between task executions (the range is 1-20)
» Day - specify the day of the week (Sunday to Saturday) and the number of weeks between task executions (the range is 1-20).
Monthly - select one of the following options:
» Recur every - enter the number of months between task executions (the range is 1-36)
» Day - specify the day in the month (1-31) and the number of months between task executions (the range is 1-36).
End The end time for a recurring task (only). Select one of the following options:
Never - enables a recurring task to be executed indefinitely
After N occurrences (where N is a number between 1-65,000) - set the number of occurrences after which the task’s scheduling will be cleared.
On - The default is the current date. Specify a different date using one of the following options:
» Enter required date directly in the text field (or edit required components of current date), in the proper format (by default: MM/DD/YY).
» Click the down arrow on the right side of the field and select a date from the calendar graphic display.
To open the Runtime Results Window for an active task:
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 205
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
Select the active task and click on Edit to open the Runtime Results window, displaying the status of the
running task.
The Runtime Results window will open automatically upon running a new task if the show runtime
results option in the last (Finish Task) step of the Task Wizard, is selected and the configured Finish
Action is run now. Currently this is applicable only for a Discovery task (see “Creating a new Discovery
Task” on page 219).
After completion of the task, the View report button becomes active. You can click on this button to
open the Task Report (see “The Task Report Window” on page 206) for the completed task.
7.4.10 The Task Report Window
The Task Report window provide details on a previously completed task.
Figure 7-24: Runtime Results Window (Network Discovery Task)
AlvariSTAR User Manual 206
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
Select an inactive task and click on Report to open the Task Report for the last activation of the task (not
available for tasks that were never run).
The Task Report for the last activation of the task can also be accessed from each task editor (see “The
Task Editor’s Controls and Indicators” on page 201).
The Task Report for any previous activations of the task can be access from the Task Results window (see
“The Task Results Window” on page 208).
The structure and contents of the Task Report depend on the specific task.
The following controls are available:
Figure 7-25: Task Report Window
To open the Task Report Window:
Button Description
Save As Click to open the Save window. Browse to a location in the file system, enter a name for the file and click Save.
Print Click to open the Print Preview window. Select the required printing preferences and click on the Print icon.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 207
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
7.4.11 The Task Results Window
The Task Results window displays a list of all past activations of the selected task selected and their
results. Not available for tasks that were never run.
In the Task Manager, select a task from and click on History. The Task Results window is displayed.
The Task Results window displays the following information for each listed activation of the selected
task:
Filter The Filter functionality is not available for some reports. Use the Drop-Down List (on the right side of the Filter text field) to open the list of possible status/result options, select the desired option and click the Filter button to view only task operations that meet the specified criterion.
Close Click to close the Task Report window.
To open the Task Results window:
Figure 7-26: Task Results Window
Parameter Description
Start The start date and time of the activation.
End The end date and time of the activation.
Result The result of the activation.
Button Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 208
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
Use the Task Results controls as required:
7.4.12 Previously Run Task (Task Rerun)
In the current release the Task Rerun feature is applicable only for Software Upgrade tasks. If a previously
executed task was completed with errors, you have several options when trying to run it again.
Upon selecting the Run option for a previously executed task that was completed with errors, the
Previously Run Task window will be displayed:
You can choose to rerun the task on all devices in the list or only on devices that meet any of the
specified conditions.
Note that if the equipment list was updated since the last time the task was executed, the task rerun will
include also all new devices that were not included in the previous list.
Action Description
View Opens the Task Report (see “The Task Report Window” on page 206) for the selected task activations instance.
Save Enables saving the Task Report for a selected task activations instance to an external file. Click to open the Save window, browse to a location in the file system, enter a name for the file and click Save.
Delete Deletes the selected task activations instance from the database of the management system.
Close Closes the Task Results window.
Figure 7-27: Previously Run Task Window
AlvariSTAR User Manual 209
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
7.4.13 Network Scan Task
The Network Scan task is a system task (task type is Network Discovery) that scans the network
searching for new devices that meet certain criteria. The scope of the network address ranges to be
searched is defined in the Discovery manager (see “Discovery Manager” on page 166). The Network
Scan task can only be modified, not deleted.
In the Task Manager window, select the Network Scan task and click on the Edit option. If the task is
Inactive, the Network Discovery Task editor is displayed.
You can modify the Retries and Timeout SNMP Parameters of the task. The Discovery Settings are
read-only and can be modified only in the Discovery manager:
The Network Scan Task is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility.
To edit the Network Scan Task
Figure 7-28: Network Discovery Task Editor
Parameter Description
Retries The maximum number of retries for SNMP communication.
The range is from 0 to 255.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 210
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
Use the Editor controls as required (for details see “The Task Editor’s Controls and Indicators” on
page 201).
7.4.14 Database Aging Tasks
The Database Aging tasks sets the maximum number of events shown in the Event History (See “Event
History Main Area” on page 105) and Audit Log (See “Audit Logs Main Area” on page 283) and enables
automating database management tasks. Database Aging tasks are system tasks and can only be
modified, not deleted.
There are two instances of tasks whose type is Database Aging:
Audit Log DAP
Event History DAP
In the Task Manager window, select either the Audit Log DAP task or the Event History DAP task and
click on the Edit option. If the task is Inactive, the Database Aging Task editor for the selected task is
displayed.
Timeout The maximum time in seconds that the requesting process waits for a response before attempting a retransmission (or aborting if the maximum number of retries has been reached).
The available range is 1 to 3,600 seconds.
To edit a Database Aging Task:
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 211
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
The Database Aging Task window includes the following information in two tabs:
By default, Database Aging tasks are defined as never-ending recurring tasks to be executed every hour.
Figure 7-29: Database Aging Task Editor, Criteria Tab
Parameter Description
Criteria tab
Table Name The name of the table. Possible values are Event History (Event History DAP task) and Audit Logs (Audit Log DAP task), according to the task that was selected. This is a read only field and cannot be modified
Max Row Count The maximum number of relevant instances in the database.
Note: When the number of instances in the database exceeds the value entered in the Max Row Count field by 25%, an alarm is sent. When the number of events exceeds the value entered in the Max Row Count field by 50%, the oldest events are deleted so that the total number of events in the database equals the value defined in the Max Row Count field.
Actions tab
Secondary Storage File type of the archived records (see Destination below). Possible values are: None, CSV
Destination A disk location on the server file system for automatic archiving of relevant events. The default location is in the NMS server is: <Disk_Drive>:\<Management_System>/filesystem/archive.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 212
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
Use the Editor controls as required (for details see “The Task Editor’s Controls and Indicators” on
page 201).
7.4.15 LDAP Backup/File Aging Task
The LDAP Backup/File Aging task is used to backup files for the management system’s LDAP
(Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) information. The LDAP backup files contain details of Users and
User Profiles, enabling easy restore of this information. The LDAP Backup/File Aging task is a system
tasks and can only be modified, not deleted. The task creates periodical backup files of LDAP data and
deletes files that are considered as too old.
In the Task Manager select the LDAP Backup/File Aging task and click on the Edit option. If the task is
Inactive, the LDAP Backup/File Aging editor is displayed:
Use the Days Threshold field to define how much time backup files should be stored in the management
system. Older files will be removed.
By default, LDAP Backup/File Aging task is defined as a never-ending recurring task to be executed every
day.
Use the Editor controls as required (for details see “The Task Editor’s Controls and Indicators” on
page 201).
7.4.16 Configuration History Backup and Aging Task
To edit the LDAP Backup/File Aging Task:
Figure 7-30: The LDAP Backup/File Aging Editor
INFORMATION
The Configuration History Backup and Aging Task is available only if the installed Device Drivers include one or more Device Driver(s) for device families that support this feature (COMPACT and 4Motion).
AlvariSTAR User Manual 213
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
The Configuration History Backup and Aging Task enables limiting the time for maintaining
Configuration History data in the database. Configuration History data is kept in the database to
support the Configuration History Request and Report feature (see “Configuration History Request and
Report” on page 59). The task is applicable for configuration history data of all relevant devices whose
Device Driver supports the Configuration History feature. This is a system task that cannot be deleted.
To open the Configuration History Backup and Aging Task Editor, select the task from the list of existing
tasks and click on the Edit option. If the task is Inactive, the Configuration History Aging Task editor is
displayed:
The Threshold Value parameter sets the maximum time in months to maintain the configuration history
data in the database. If when running the task there is configuration history data for which the elapsed
time since it was added to the database is higher than this value, this “old” data will be deleted from the
database and saved in the NMS server file system in
<Disk_Drive>:\<Management_System>/filesystem/AuditBackup.
The range is from 1 to 6 months. The default is 3 months.
By default, Configuration History Backup and Aging task is defined as a never-ending recurring task to
be executed every day.
Use the Editor controls as required (for details see “The Task Editor’s Controls and Indicators” on
page 201).
7.4.17 File Data Aging Tasks
The File Data Aging Task enables limiting the time for maintaining Performance Collection files in the
database (see also “Data Files Manager” on page 174. By default, the collected performance data is
saved in the management system’s database. In addition, the performance data xml files can be
Figure 7-31: Configuration History Aging Task Editor
INFORMATION File Data Aging task(s) are only if the installed Device Driver(s) include one or more Device Driver(s) for device families that support this feature (COMPACT and 4Motion). The relevant tasks are:
COMPACT File Data Aging
4M File Data Aging
AlvariSTAR User Manual 214
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
exported and saved in the management system’s server file system. The task enables limiting the time
that these files will be saved (in both places if applicable) to avoid allocation of too much disk space for
“old” data. This is a system task that cannot be deleted.
To open the File Data Aging Task Editor for a specific device family, select the relevant task from the list
of existing tasks and click on the Edit option. If the task is Inactive, the File Data Aging Task editor is
displayed:
The days-threshold parameter sets the maximum time to maintain files in the database (and in the
server’s file system if applicable). If the elapsed time since a file was added to the database is higher than
the value configures for the days-threshold parameter, the file will be deleted from the database (and
from the server’s file system if applicable).
Use the Editor controls as required (for details see “The Task Editor’s Controls and Indicators” on
page 201).
7.4.18 Mutual Neighboring Task
This section includes:
Introduction to the Mutual Neighboring Task
The Mutual Neighboring Task Editor
The Mutual Neighboring Task Report
Figure 7-32: File Data Aging Task Editor
INFORMATION
The Mutual Neighboring Task is available only if the installed Device Drivers include one or more Device Driver(s) for device families that support this feature (COMPACT and 4Motion).
The Mutual Neighboring Task is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 215
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
7.4.18.1 Introduction to the Mutual Neighboring Task
In a properly configured system, neighboring definition between 2 Base Stations (BSs) must always be
mutual: if BS1 is defined as a neighbor of BS2, then BS2 must be defined as a neighbor of BS1. The
Mutual Neighboring Task enables checking consistency of neighboring BSs definition across the entire
Radio Access Network, reporting all non-mutual neighbors, and optionally fixing neighboring
definitions. It also enables updating all relevant neighbor parameters in all or selected BSs. This is a
system task that cannot be deleted.
To open the Mutual Neighboring task editor, select the task from the list of existing tasks and click on
the Edit option.If the task is Inactive, the Mutual Neighboring task editor is displayed:
7.4.18.2 The Mutual Neighboring Task Editor
The task editor includes the following components:
Operation
Data Retrieval
Find Panel
Figure 7-33: Mutual Neighboring Task Editor (with results)
AlvariSTAR User Manual 216
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
Results Table
Actions Panel
7.4.18.2.1 OperationThe Operation radio buttons enable defining the operation to be executed for the next run of the task,
as described below:
7.4.18.2.2 Data RetrievalThe Data Retrieval radio buttons enable defining the data retrieval mode for the next run of the task:
7.4.18.2.3 Find PanelFor general details on using the filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.
The criteria available for Advanced Filtering includes all parameters available in the Results table (see
below).
7.4.18.2.4 Results TableAfter running the task, the results table displays the results of the last run. Each entry represent a
neighboring definition and includes the following sortable and filterable parameters:
Option Description
Report All In the next run the task will load all the neighboring definitions from the network (see Data Retrieval below) and check all of them for mutuality. It will report all the results in a tabular view (see “Results Table” on page 217 below). This is the default mode.
Fix All In the next run the task will load all the neighboring definitions from the network (see “Data Retrieval” on page 217 below) and will check all of them for mutuality. If needed, it will try fixing all non-mutual definitions. In addition, it will attempt updating all relevant parameters in all BSs. It will report all the results in a tabular view (see “Results Table” on page 217 below).
Custom This mode enables the user to make selective operations per each neighboring definition presented in the Results Table after the last run, using a right click menu over the selected items (see details in “Actions Panel” on page 218 below).
Option Description
Database The neighboring definitions of all BSs in the entire Radio Access Network will be taken from the Management System’s database. This is the default mode.
Device The neighboring definitions will be taken from all relevant devices in the Radio Access Network.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 217
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
7.4.18.2.5 Actions PanelExcept to Export operation, all the following operations are available only in Custom mode:
Parameter Description
Status The result of the operation executed in the last run: Completed or Failed.
Operation The neighboring definition operation: Report, Fix or Delete.
First BS ID The BS ID of the first BS in the pair tested for mutuality.
Second BS ID The BS ID of the second BS in the pair tested for mutuality.
First Location The Location defined in the database for the BTS of the first BS.
First Site The Name defined in the database for the BTS of the first BS.
First IP The Management IP Address of the BTS of the first BS.
Second Location The Location defined in the database for the BTS of the second BS.
Second Site The Name defined in the database for the BTS of the second BS.
Second IP The Management IP Address of the BTS of the second BS.
Operation Description
New Select to add a new Neighboring Definition entry. You will be prompted to specify two BS IDs and a Neighboring Operation between them - Report, Fix or Delete. The new definition will be added to the view, with the chosen Neighboring Operation pending for the next run of the task.
Remove Select to remove a Neighboring Definition from the view. This will not affect the actual Neighboring Definition in the devices/database. It will only remove the Neighboring Definition from the next run of the task in Custom mode.
Report Select to report the status of the selected Neighboring Definitions upon the next run of the task in Custom mode.
Fix Select to fix and/or update relevant parameters in the selected Neighboring Definitions upon the next run of the task in Custom mode
Delete Select to physically remove the selected Neighboring Definitions from the relevant devices/database upon the next run of the task in Custom mode.
Export Select to export details of selected entries to CSV file.
Import Select to import correct neighbors data from CSV in the following form:
<First_BS_ID>,<Second_BS_ID>[,<Operation>]
<Operation> Field can be Report, Fix or Delete. It can be ignored, in which case Report operation will be used by default.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 218
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
7.4.18.3 The Mutual Neighboring Task Report
The report includes detailed results for all neighboring definitions, including operation (Report, Fix or
Delete) and failure reason for failed operations. For more details on using the Task Report’s control see
“The Task Report Window” on page 206.
7.4.19 Discovery Task
The Discovery Task enables to scan a single range of IP addresses searching for devices that meet certain
criteria whose IP address is not included in the current equipment database.
This section includes:
Creating a new Discovery Task
Editing an existing Discovery Task
7.4.19.1 Creating a new Discovery Task
This section includes:
Starting the Task Wizard
Figure 7-34: Mutual Neighboring Task Report
The Discovery Task is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility
AlvariSTAR User Manual 219
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
Creating a new Discovery Task - Step 1 (Create New Task)
Creating a new Discovery Task - Step 2 (Configure Task)
Creating a new Discovery Task - Step 3 (Finish Task)
7.4.19.1.1 Starting the Task Wizard
To create a new Discovery task, click on the New option in the Tasks Manager to open the first step of
the Task Wizard.
7.4.19.1.2 Creating a new Discovery Task - Step 1 (Create New Task)
Step 1 (Create New Task) of the wizard includes the following parameters:
To create a new Discovery Task:
Figure 7-35: Discovery Task Step 1 (Create New Task)
Parameter Description
Name The name of the task. A string of from 1 to 128 printable characters. The name must be unique in the system and cannot include the following characters: /,\,?,<,>,:,*,^,|,"
Description An optional description of the task.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 220
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
Click Next to apply the configuration and continue to next step.
7.4.19.1.3 Creating a new Discovery Task - Step 2 (Configure Task)
Step 2 (Configure Task) of the wizard includes the following parameters:
Category The task’s category. Currently only the Discovery Task option is available.
Created By Read-only. The name of the user creating the new task.
Figure 7-36: Discovery Task Step 2 (Configure Task)
Parameter Description
Task Name The name of the task. Read-only-taken from the Task Name configured in previous step.
Range Type The type of range definition: IP Range or Subnet. Select from the drop-down menu whether to define the range using IP Range (the first and last address in the range) or Subnet (Network and Mask). The default for a new entry is IP Range.
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 221
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
Range Start The first IP address in an IP Range or the Subnet base address in a Subnet.
Range End/Subnet Mask
The last IP address in an IP Range or the Subnet Mask in a Subnet.
To minimize unnecessary traffic load in the network, avoid defining IP address ranges that include too many “gaps”, e.g., non existing addresses.
Location The optional location to be assigned to newly discovered devices whose IP address is in the range/subnet. Click on the Open Selector button to open the Select location window allowing you to select a pre-configured location. For details refer to “The Select location Window” on page 103.
Contact The optional contact to be assigned to newly discovered devices whose IP address is in the range/subnet. Click on the Open Selector button to open the Select contact window allowing you to select a pre-configured contact. For details refer to “The Select contact Window” on page 193.
Retries The maximum number of retries for SNMP communication.
The range is from 0 to 255.
Timeout(s) The maximum time in seconds that the requesting process waits for a response before attempting a retransmission (or aborting if the maximum number of retries has been reached).
The available range is 1 to 3,600 seconds.
SNMP Version The SNMP protocol version used by the devices the NMS is attempting to discover. The available options are:
v1
v2c
v3
All products supported by the current release support version v2c. However, you may define either v1 or v2c - the management system will identify and use the correct version (v2c).
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 222
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
Click Next to apply the configuration and continue to next step.
SNMP Credentials Use the Add and Remove buttons to populate the SNMP Credentials. At least one set of credentials must be defined. The type of credentials differ, depending on the SNMP version.
For SNMP v1 and v2c, fill in the read/write community table:
Read Community - SNMP Read community to be used by discovery when accessing devices in the range.
Write Community - The SNMP Write community to be used when accessing discovered devices in the range.
For SNMP v3, the following credentials apply:
Username - Username used for authentication
Security Level - Authentication and privacy settings
» NoAuth_NoPriv - Both authentication and privacy are disabled
» Auth_NoPriv - Authentication is enabled and privacy is disabled
» Auth_Priv - Both authentication and privacy are enabled
Authentication Algorithm - Hashing algorithm applied to the authentication password
» MD5 - Message-Digest algorithm 5
» SHA - Secure Hash Algorithm
Authentication Password - Password used for authentication. At least 8 printable characters. For security reasons the password is displayed as a string of *.
Privacy Algorithm - Encryption standard used for data transmission
» AES - Uses the Advanced Encryption Standard
» DES - Uses the Data Encryption Standard
Privacy Password - Encryption key used by the privacy algorithm. At least 8 printable characters. For security reasons the password is displayed as a string of *.
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 223
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
7.4.19.1.4 Creating a new Discovery Task - Step 3 (Finish Task)
Step 3 (Finish Task) of the wizard includes the following parameters:
Figure 7-37: Discovery Task Step 3 (Finish Task)
Parameter Description
Finish Action The action to be performed after finishing task creation:
none (the default): No action except adding the new task to the Task Manager (after clicking on the Finish button).
run now: Add the task to the Task Manager and run it.
schedule: Add the task to the task manager and open the Schedule Editor (See “The Task Scheduler” on page 203) for scheduling the task.
show runtime results Available only if selected Finish Action is run now. If selected (marked), the Runtime Result window (See “The Runtime Results Window” on page 205) will open when the task starts running.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 224
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
7.4.19.2 Editing an existing Discovery Task
To edit an existing Discovery Task, select the Task from the list and click on the Edit option. If the task is
Inactive, the Discovery Task Editor for the selected task will open.
The Discovery Task editor includes exactly the same parameters as in Step 2 (Configure Task) of the
Task Wizard when creating a new Discovery Task (see “Creating a new Discovery Task - Step 2
(Configure Task)” on page 221. The only difference is that the Task Name can be modified: The Task
Name is a string of up to 128 printable characters that must be unique in the system and cannot
include the following characters: /,\,?,<,>,:,*,^,|,":
7.4.20 Multiple Configuration Task
This section includes:
The Multiple Configuration Task
The BS Selector
Figure 7-38: Discovery Task Editor
AlvariSTAR User Manual 225
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
7.4.20.1 The Multiple Configuration Task
The template based Multiple Configuration task enables modifying the configuration of selected devices
using a pre-prepared template. For details on templates and how they are used to modify configuration
of target objects refer to “The Configuration Templates Manager” on page 84.
To create a new task from the Template Manager select the template you want to use and click on the
Apply option to open the Multiple Configuration Task editor. By default the task editor will include the
selected template as the Equipment Template.
To create a new task from the Equipment Manager, select the target device(s) and click on the Multiple
Configuration option. All selected devices must be of the same Type. The Template Selector will open,
displaying only templates for the relevant equipment type, enabling selection of the template to be used
(see “The Template Selector Window” on page 88). Select the template to use and click Apply to open
the Multiple Configuration Task editor. By default the task editor will include the selected template as
the Equipment Template and all selected devices will be included in the Equipment Selector table. For a
BS template, all BSs of each of the selected devices will be included.
To open an existing task, select an existing Multiple Configuration task from the list and click on the Edit
option. If the task is Inactive, the Multiple Configuration Task Editor for the selected task is displayed.
In the Local CRAFT Utility, the Multiple Configuration Task is applicable only to the managed device.
To open the Multiple Configuration Task Editor:
AlvariSTAR User Manual 226
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
The Multiple Configuration Task editor comprises the following fields:
Figure 7-39: Multiple Configuration Task Editor
Parameter Description
Name The name of the task. A string of 1 to 128 printable characters. The name must be unique and cannot include the following characters: /,\,?,<,>,:,*,^,|,".
Description An optional free text field providing a general description of the task. When the task is opened from the Configurations Template manager, the default description is “Multiple configuration task based on template: <template_name>”.
Equipment Template The default is the template selected during the process of creating a new task, or the previously defined template in an existing task. You can use the Open Selector button to open the Template Selector and select the template you want to use from the list of all previously defined templates. For details refer to “The Template Selector Window” on page 88.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 227
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
The Equipment Selector table includes the following details for each device participating in the task:
Click Add to open the Selector window, allowing you to add objects to the Equipment table (For a task
using a BS template, see details in The BS Selector below. For tasks using other MO types, see The
Equipment Selector Window). Each template is associated with specific Equipment Type, MO Type and
Release Number. The available objects in the selector are those with Equipment Type and Release
Number matching those of the selected template.
Click Remove to remove one or several selected objects from the table. To select/de-select multiple
objects you can use the traditional Shift-Click and Ctrl-Click selection/de-selection methods. For a task
configured to use a BS template, use the expand/collapse (+/-) signs on the left side of each BTS object
to view/hide its BSs, allowing also removal of specific BSs.
7.4.20.2 The BS Selector
The BS Selector enables to select objects for a BS template based Multiple Configuration Task.
To open the BS Selector, click on the Add button in the task editor for a BS template based Multiple
Configuration Task:
Preview Only Select to define a preview task. Preview option allows getting the full report without performing any actual modification to the devices. All validation rules are verified. This enables the user to gain confidence on performing the multiple configuration task. Typically the user will run the multiple configuration task without preview when he has no more errors in the Preview task report.
Parameter Description
Name The name of the device (for a BS template based task use the expand/collapse (+/-) signs on the left side to view/hide selected BS ID LSBs).
SW Version The running SW version of the device.
IP Address The IP address of the device.
State The operational state of the device
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 228
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
The grid view comprises a table that includes details on all the currently available BTSs with Equipment
Type and Release Number matching those of the selected template.
Use the expand/collapse (+/-) signs on the left side of each BTS object to view/hide its BSs,
The read-only information displayed for each entry includes:
You can use the filtering options in the search/filter panel to display only objects that meet certain
criteria. For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on
page 12.
Advanced Filters include the following criteria:
BS ID LSB
Name
BTS Number
Software Version
IP Address
Figure 7-40: BS Selector
Parameter Description
Name The name of the device, or the name of the BS as configured in the device for a BS object in a BS template based task.
BTS Number/BS ID LSB The BTS Number for a BTS object, or the BS ID LSB for a BS object.
IP Address The management IP address of the device (applicable only for a BTS object).
State The operational state of the device (applicable only for a BTS object).
AlvariSTAR User Manual 229
Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager
To select/de-select multiple objects you can use the traditional Shift-Click and Ctrl-Click
selection/de-selection methods.
Select the required object(s) and click Apply. The selector will be closed and the selected object(s) will be
added to the Equipment Selector table in the Multiple Configuration Task editor.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 230
Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager
7.5 Preferences Manager
This section includes:
Introduction to the Preferences Manager
Application Configuration
NBI Notifications
Map
Homepage
7.5.1 Introduction to the Preferences Manager
The Preferences Manager enables management of various types of general parameters that affect
functionality of other managers/management applications.
Select Management > Preferences from the Main Menu. The Preferences tab is added to the tabs ribbon
and the Preferences Manager is displayed.
When opened for the first time, the configuration section is empty and only the function selector on the
left side of the screen is available:
Use the function selector on the left side of the screen to select the required option:
Application Configuration
NBI Notifications
Map
Homepage
To open the User Preferences Manager
Figure 7-41: The Preferences Manager, Function Selector Panel
AlvariSTAR User Manual 231
Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager
7.5.2 Application Configuration
The Application Configuration node enables configuring parameters related to communication with
other management applications. Use the expand/collapse (+/-) signs to view/hide the following options:
StarQuality
StarACS
CSR
7.5.2.1 StarQuality
CAUTION For properly supporting operation with the Portal, the StarQuality must have a license for support of SOAP (Simple Object Access Protocol).
All sites discovered and managed by AlvariSTAR should also be monitored by StarQuality.
Figure 7-42: Preferences Manager - Application Configuration - StarQuality
AlvariSTAR User Manual 232
Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager
1 Select the Yes option for Configured.
2 In the IP Address field, enter the StarQuality’s IP Address.
3 In the HTTP Port field, enter the StarQuality’s HTTP port number (the default is 80).
4 In the Username field, enter the Username to be used for login to the StarQuality (the default is
portal, with Read-Only privileges).
5 In the Password field, enter the Password to be used with the specified Username for login to the
StarQuality (the default is portal123). For security reasons the Password is displayed as a string of *
characters.
1 In the Host Address field, enter the IP address of the database.
2 In the Port field, enter the HTTP port number (the default is 1521).
3 In the Database Name field, enter the configured name of the database (the default is sq).
4 In the Username field, enter the Username to be used for login to the database (the default is sq).
5 In the Password field, enter the Password to be used with the specified Username for login to the
database (the default is sq). For security reasons the Password is displayed as a string of * characters.
6 Click on the Test Connection button to check the connection to the database. If there is an error
message, try to correct parameters or check the route to the database.
7 Click on the Apply button in the right bottom corner of the screen to apply the configuration.
To configure the StarQuality application parameters:
To configure the Database Connections parameters for StarQuality:
AlvariSTAR User Manual 233
Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager
7.5.2.2 StarACS
1 Select the Yes option for Configured.
2 In the IP field, enter the StarACS’s IP Address.
3 In the HTTP Port field, enter the StarACS’s HTTP port number (the default is 80).
4 In the JNP Port field, enter the StarACS’s JNP port number (the default is 1099).
Figure 7-43: Preferences Manager - Application Configuration - StarACS
To configure the StarACS application parameters:
To configure the Database Connections parameters for StarACS:
AlvariSTAR User Manual 234
Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager
1 In the Database Type field select the database Type: Oracle or MySQL.
2 In the Host Address field, enter the IP address of the database.
3 In the Port field, enter the HTTP port number (the default is 1521 for Oracle, 3306 for MySQL).
4 In the Database Name field, enter the configured name of the database (the default is dps).
5 In the Username field, enter the Username to be used for login to the database (the default is dps).
6 In the Password field, enter the Password to be used with the specified Username for login to the
database (the default is dps). For security reasons the Password is displayed as a string of * characters.
7 Click on the Test Connection button to check the connection to the database. If there is an error
message, try to correct parameters or check the route to the database.
8 Click on the Apply button in the right bottom corner of the screen to apply the configuration.
7.5.2.3 CSR
Figure 7-44: Preferences Manager - Application Configuration - CSR
AlvariSTAR User Manual 235
Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager
1 Select the Yes option for Configured.
2 In the IP Address field, enter the StarACS’s IP Address (CSR application should be installed on the
StarACS server).
3 In the HTTP Port field, enter the StarACS’s HTTP port number (the default is 80).
4 In the Username field, enter the Username to be used for login to the CSR application (the default is
admin).
5 In the Password field, enter the Password to be used with the specified Username for login to the CSR
application (the default is admin). For security reasons the Password is displayed as a string of *
characters.
6 Click on the Apply button in the right bottom corner of the screen to apply the configuration.
7.5.3 NBI Notifications
The NBI Notifications section enables configuration of parameters to be used by all enabled NBI Events
Forwarding instances (see “NBI Events Forwarding Manager” on page 116). These include parameter of
synchronization notifications sent by the management system to a higher-hierarchy manager and
selection of traps types to be forwarded.
To configure the CSR application parameters:
AlvariSTAR User Manual 236
Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager
The following settings are available:
Figure 7-45: Preferences Manager - NBI Notifications
Parameter Description
Notifications
Keep Alive Sends keep alive notifications at predefined time intervals as long as the NMS server is active. Select to enable, de-select to disable. The default is selected (enabled)
Interval (minutes) Defines the time interval (in minutes) between successive keep alive notifications. Use the text box to enter the desired value. The default is 3 minutes.
Server Started Sends a notification message when the server has started up. Select to enable, de-select to disable.The default is selected (enabled)
Server Shutdown Sends a notification message when the server is shutting down. Select to enable, de-select to disable.The default is selected (enabled)
AlvariSTAR User Manual 237
Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager
Click on the Apply button in the right bottom corner of the screen to apply changes.
Event Types
Send Original Traps/Send NMS Events
Select the Send Original Traps option to forward traps in their original format, just as they are received from the managed equipment. This is the default.
Select the Send NMS Events option to send messages created by the management system according to definitions in relevant templates instead of original traps.
INFORMATION
In order to enable synchronization with the management system, the following RW parameters must be configured in the higher-hierarchy manager:
Parameter Description
sendOperationalAlarms Enables/Disables alarm synchronization. The following values apply:
0 - Synchronization disabled
1 - Synchronization enabled
2 - Synchronization based on a custom time interval
3 - Synchronization based on a custom SeqNo interval
opAlarmsCustomIntervalStart Interval start for custom time/SeqNo interval based synchronization
opAlarmsCustomIntervalEnd Interval end for custom time/SeqNo interval based synchronization
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 238
Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager
7.5.4 Map
The Map configuring screen enables configuring parameter related to KPIs (Key Performance Indicators)
to be used for presentation of sector on a geographical map (see “Key Performance Indicators” on
page 34). It also enables managing import/export actions related to geolocation information of
BTSs/MSs.
The Map screen includes the following sections:
Sector’s Color based on KPI
MS Coordinates Import
Import/Export GPS Data
7.5.4.1 Sector’s Color based on KPI
This section enables defining the KPIs (Key Performance Indicators) to be used for displaying BS’s sector
color on the map. For details on the meaning of each color in accordance with the relevant KPI) value
refer to “Key Performance Indicators” on page 34.
A different KPI may be selected for each product family.
KPIs for 4Motion/COMPACT devices are based on information recorded in StarQuality for the last
15-minutes period for which there is available data regarding the relevant BS. The available options are:
Figure 7-46: Preferences Manager - Map
AlvariSTAR User Manual 239
Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager
DL Air Link Utilization, Data Zone
SINR Distribution Downlink - SINR (SINR distribution Downlink less than 5dB)
DL Throughput Total
KPIs for Extreme devices are based on real-time counters taken by the management system every 5
minutes from each device using SNMP. The available options are:
Click on the Apply button in the right bottom corner of the screen to apply changes.
7.5.4.2 MS Coordinates Import
This section includes:
The MS Coordinates File
Importing an MS Coordinates File
The Geolocation and Bing Tasks
Table 7-1: Extreme KPI Details
KPI Description
UL NACK Uplink NACK rate. Computed using the following formula:
UL NACK = 100*SUM(NACK Frames/ACK Frames)/Number of MSs.
where:
NACK Frames=number of non-acknowledged uplink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.
ACK Frames= number of acknowledged uplink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.
Note: if for a certain MS number of acknowledged frames is zero, the MS shall not be taken into consideration when performing the average.
DL NACK Downlink NACK rate. Computed using the following formula:
DL NACK = 100*SUM(NACK Frames/ACK Frames)/Number of MSs.
where:
NACK Frames=number of non-acknowledged downlink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.
ACK Frames= number of acknowledged downlink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.
Note: if for a certain MS number of acknowledged frames is zero, the MS shall not be taken into consideration when performing the average.
NACK DL UL Ratios The maximum value of UL NACK and DL NACK (described above).
AlvariSTAR User Manual 240
Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager
7.5.4.2.1 The MS Coordinates FileThe MS Coordinates Import utility enables loading to the system MS coordinates files with MS(s) location
details. These location details may be used to display the an MS in its geolocation.
An MS location details may specify either its geolocation (latitude/longitude) or its full address.
The system accepts files with MS(s) location details that meet the following rules:
1 The file is a text file, parameters are comma separated.
2 Each line describes one MS, and can have a variable length.
3 A line always starts with an MS’s Serial Number. The Serial Number must be a valid one (exists in the
ACS database).
4 The second parameter in each line is either "ADDR" or "LATLONG" (case-insensitive), defining the
type of location information to be provided by the following parameters.
5 If the second parameter is "LATLONG", the rest of the line should contain two floating point numbers
or degrees:minutes:seconds, defining latitude and longitude. If no latitude and longitude details
follow "LATLONG", the system assumes the user wants to delete the latitude and longitude
information in the system (if available) for the specific MS.
6 If the second parameter is "ADDR", the line should contain the following parameters:
a Country
b State (required only if the country is US)
c City
d Rest of the address
If no address details follow "ADDR", the system assumes the user wants to delete the address
information in the system (if available) for the specific MS.
The utility offers the option of using Bing Spatial Data Services to try resolving the latitude/longitude
coordinates of “ADDR” MSs.
7.5.4.2.2 Importing an MS Coordinates File
1 Click on the Open Selector icon next to the Import File field. The Open window will open:
To load an MS Coordinates File:
AlvariSTAR User Manual 241
Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager
2 Browse to the required location and select the pre-prepared file.
3 Click Open. The selected file details will be displayed in the Import File field.
4 Click on the Import button to create a new Geolocation Task (see The Geolocation and Bing Tasks
below) and open the task’s window. The new task will be added to the tasks list in the Geolocations
Tasks table below and in the Tasks manager. If the file includes ADDR lines, then the Geolocation task
will initiate a Bing task trying to resolve the latitude/longitude coordinates using Bing Spatial Data
Services.
The Geolocation Tasks table provide status details on created Geolocation tasks. It also provides status
details for created Bing tasks. These tasks can be deleted from the Task Manager.
The Update entry provide the date and time of updating the ACS database (applicable only for Bing
tasks).
Click on the View Report option to view the task’s report (not applicable for a task which was never
run).
7.5.4.2.3 The Geolocation and Bing Tasks
Figure 7-47: Import MS Coordinates File
Figure 7-48: Geolocation Task
AlvariSTAR User Manual 242
Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager
Figure 7-49: Geolocation Task Report
Figure 7-50: Bing Task
AlvariSTAR User Manual 243
Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager
The Geolocation and Bing tasks cannot be edited. They provide read-only information of the Task Name:
Geolocation Task #<number) or Bing Task #<number>, where the number is generated automatically by
the management system. In a Geolocation task the read-only details of the Uploaded File are also
available (not applicable for a Bing task).
A Bing task will be activated by a Geolocation task only if the file includes at least one valid ADDR entry.
A Geolocation task created from the Preferences manager may be executed later (or again) from the
Tasks manager. A Bing task may also be executed again from the Tasks manager. From the Tasks
manager you can also delete these tasks.
For each address successfully resolved by a Bing task the latitude/longitude parameters of the MS in the
ACS database will be updated.
If the geolocation service returned zero results or more than one result, only the address information is
stored on the management system. You may try later to resolve the geolocation of such MSs one by one
(see“Switching to Map View for a selected MS” on page 150 and “Editing MS Location Details” on
page 151).
If the file includes only LATLONG entries the Geolocation task will update the latitude/longitude
parameters of relevant MSs in the ACS database without initiating a Bing task.
Figure 7-51: Bing Task Report
AlvariSTAR User Manual 244
Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager
7.5.4.3 Import/Export GPS Data
This section includes the following options:
Import Site Coordinates
Export Site Coordinates
7.5.4.3.1 Import Site CoordinatesThe Import Site Coordinates function enables importing a previously generated backup file that contains
the location details for devices that do not support GPS.
Click on the Import Site Coordinates’s Open Selector icon to open the Import File Coordinates window:
To import a file with sites coordinates information, browse to the required location, select the file you
want to import and click on the Import button. The location details of all discovered devices in the
database that do not use GPS and are included in the imported file will be updated (if applicable) with
information from the file.
NOTE! Bing Spatial Data Services may not be available due to one of the following reasons:
Another user is running a Bing Spatial Data Services job. There can be only one running job at a time per server.
The maximum number of jobs has been reached. The maximum number of jobs is limited to 50 jobs per 24 hours per a Bing Maps Key (account). The management system has a single Bing Maps Key.
To import a Site Coordinates File:
Figure 7-52: Import Site Coordinates
AlvariSTAR User Manual 245
Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager
7.5.4.3.2 Export Site CoordinatesThe Export Site Coordinates function enables generating a backup file that contains the location details
defined in the Network Element Editor for each device that does not support GPS.
Click on the Export Site Coordinates’s Save icon to open the Import File Coordinates window:
To export a file with the current sites coordinates information, define the file name, browse to the
desired location and click on the Export button.
To export a Site Coordinates File:
Figure 7-53: Export Site Coordinates
AlvariSTAR User Manual 246
Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager
7.5.5 Homepage
The Homepage screen enables selection of the charts/graphs to be displayed in the Home Page (see
“The Home Page” on page 17). The available options depend on the installed management
applications.
Most of the charts/graphs provide the variation over time (current value and value one hour/one day
ago). If the current value differs from previous value, an arrow will indicate whether the value increased
(green) or decreased (red).
Mouse hovering over any active area of a chart triggers the display of the legend and actual value of the
area under mouse hovering.
After completing selection of charts/graphs, click on the Apply button in the right bottom corner of the
screen to apply changes.
The available options for each of the six zones available in the Home Page (the same chart/graph cannot
be selected more than once) include:
Options that are available always:
Figure 7-54: Preferences Manager - Homepage
AlvariSTAR User Manual 247
Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager
Available options if StarQuality Is available:
Available options if StarACS Is available:
7.5.5.1 Options that are available always:
BTSs Management Chart / hourly
BTSs Management Chart / daily
Open Alarms - Critical / hourly
Open Alarms - Critical / daily
BTSs with Critical Alarm / hourly
BTSs with Critical Alarm / daily
BTSs SW Versions Chart
7.5.5.1.1 BTSs Management Chart / hourlyDescription: A pie-chart of BTS management status (Managed, Unreachable, Unknown, Unlicensed,
Unmanageable, Unmanaged) distribution, plus variation details over the last hour.
Units of measurement: Percentage, up to 2 decimal points.
Refresh time: 2 minutes.
7.5.5.1.2 BTSs Management Chart / dailyDescription: A pie-chart of BTS management status (Managed, Unreachable, Unknown, Unlicensed,
Unmanageable, Unmanaged) distribution, plus variation details over the last day.
Units of measurement: Percentage, up to 2 decimal points.
Refresh time: 2 minutes.
7.5.5.1.3 Open Alarms - Critical / hourlyDescription: A dial-meter gauge indicator showing the current total number of open critical alarms, plus
variation details over the last hour.
Refresh time: 2 minutes.
7.5.5.1.4 Open Alarms - Critical / dailyDescription: A dial-meter gauge indicator showing the current total number of open critical alarms, plus
variation details over the last day.
Refresh time: 2 minutes.
7.5.5.1.5 BTSs with Critical Alarm / hourlyDescription: A dial-meter gauge indicator showing the current number of BTSs with open critical alarms,
plus variation details over the last hour.
Refresh time: 2 minutes.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 248
Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager
7.5.5.1.6 BTSs with Critical Alarm / dailyDescription: A dial-meter gauge indicator showing the current number of BTSs with open critical alarms,
plus variation details over the last day.
Refresh time: 2 minutes.
7.5.5.1.7 BTSs SW Versions ChartDescription: A pie chart of BTSs SW versions distribution.
Units of measurement: Percentage, up to 2 decimal points.
Refresh time: 2 minutes.
7.5.5.2 Available options if StarQuality Is available:
Number of Registered MSs / hourly
Number of Registered MSs / daily
BSs with more than 50 MSs / hourly
BSs with more than 50 MSs / daily
BSs with more than 90 MSs / hourly
BSs with more than 90 MSs / daily
Number of Sites With Low ALU (20%) / hourly
Number of Sites With Low ALU (20%) / daily
Number of Sites With High ALU (95%) / hourly
Number of Sites With High ALU (95%) / daily
MSs Online (SQ) / hourly
MSs Online (SQ) / daily
7.5.5.2.1 Number of Registered MSs / hourlyDescription: The number of registered MSs at the current time - shown as a dial-meter gauge, plus
variation details over the last hour.
Refresh time: 2 minutes.
7.5.5.2.2 Number of Registered MSs / dailyDescription: The number of registered MSs at the current time - shown as a dial-meter gauge, plus
variation details over the last day.
Refresh time: 2 minutes.
7.5.5.2.3 BSs with more than 50 MSs / hourlyDescription: The number of BSs serving more than 50 active MSs - shown as a dial-meter gauge, plus
variation details over the last hour.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 249
Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager
Refresh time: 15 minutes.
7.5.5.2.4 BSs with more than 50 MSs / dailyDescription: The number of BSs serving more than 50 active MSs - shown as a dial-meter gauge, plus
variation details over the last day.
Refresh time: 15 minutes.
7.5.5.2.5 BSs with more than 90 MSs / hourlyDescription: The number of BSs serving more than 90 active MSs - shown as a dial-meter gauge, plus
variation details over the last hour.
Refresh time: 15 minutes.
7.5.5.2.6 BSs with more than 90 MSs / dailyDescription: The number of BSs serving more than 90 active MSs - shown as a dial-meter gauge, plus
variation details over the last day.
Refresh time: 15 minutes.
7.5.5.2.7 Number of Sites With Low ALU (20%) / hourlyDescription: The number of BTSs with at least one BS having during the last hour an average ALU
(Downlink Air Link Utilization) lower than 20% - shown as a dial-meter gauge, plus variation details over
the last hour.
Refresh time: 15 minutes.
7.5.5.2.8 Number of Sites With Low ALU (20%) / dailyDescription: The number of BTSs with at least one BS having during the last day an average ALU
(Downlink Air Link Utilization) lower than 20% - shown as a dial-meter gauge, plus variation details over
the last day.
Refresh time: 15 minutes.
7.5.5.2.9 Number of Sites With High ALU (95%) / hourlyDescription: The number of BTSs with at least one BS having during the last hour an average ALU
(Downlink Air Link Utilization) higher than 95% - shown as a dial-meter gauge, plus variation details
over the last hour.
Refresh time: 15 minutes.
7.5.5.2.10 Number of Sites With High ALU (95%) / dailyDescription: The number of BTSs with at least one BS having during the last day an average ALU
(Downlink Air Link Utilization) higher than 95% - shown as a dial-meter gauge, plus variation details
over the last day.
Refresh time: 15 minutes.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 250
Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager
7.5.5.2.11 MSs Online (SQ) / hourlyDescription: The number "Active" MSs (for which wStarQuality collected at least 1 KPI sample during
the last 24 hours) - shown as a dial-meter gauge, plus variation details over the last hour.
Refresh time: 15 minutes.
7.5.5.2.12 MSs Online (SQ) / dailyDescription: The number "Active" MSs (for which StarQuality collected at least 1 KPI sample during the
last 24 hours) - shown as a dial-meter gauge, plus variation details over the last day.
Refresh time: 15 minutes.
7.5.5.3 Available options if StarACS Is available:
MSs Online (ACS) / daily
Number of MSs With More Than 3 Reboots (ACS) / daily
Newly Registered MSs (ACS) / daily
7.5.5.3.1 MSs Online (ACS) / dailyDescription: For each day, if a MS had at least one activity logged into the main facts table of StarACS,
the MS is considered to have been online for the whole day. The current number of “online” MSs
(contacted the StarACS server at least once during the current day) is shown as a dial-meter gauge
gauge indicator, plus variation details over the last day.
Refresh time: 15 minutes.
7.5.5.3.2 Number of MSs With More Than 3 Reboots (ACS) / dailyDescription: The current number of MSs that rebooted more than three times during the current day is
shown as a dial-meter gauge indicator, plus variation details over the last day.
Refresh time: 15 minutes.
7.5.5.3.3 Newly Registered MSs (ACS) / dailyDescription: The current number of newly registered MSs (MSs that registered during the last day) is
shown as a dial-meter gauge indicator, plus variation details over the last day.
Refresh time: 15 minutes.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 251
Chapter 8 - Administration
In This Chapter:
“Users Manager” on page 253
“User Profiles Manager” on page 269
“User Sessions Manager” on page 279
“The Audit Logs Manager” on page 282
“Licenses Manager” on page 285
“Password Policy Manager” on page 290
“User Domain Manager” on page 293
“External Entities Mapping Manager” on page 295
Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager
8.1 Users Manager
This section includes:
Introduction to the Users Manager
Users Main Area
User Details Panels
Users Actions Panel
Find Users Panel
Creating a new User
Editing an existing User
Reset Password
The User Selector
8.1.1 Introduction to the Users Manager
The Users Manager displays information on the currently configured users and associated properties and
enables creating new users and editing the properties of existing users.
By default, the system is provided with several default users with assigned default user profiles:
The default users cannot be deleted, and the default user profiles assigned to them cannot be removed.
Select Administration > Users from the Main Menu. The Users tab is added to the tabs ribbon and the
Users Manager is displayed.
Default User Name Default User Profile
admin Administrator
manager Managers
observer Observers
To open the Users Manager
AlvariSTAR User Manual 253
Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager
8.1.2 Users Main Area
The Users grid view comprises a table that includes details on all the currently configured users.
Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.
By default, the read-only information displayed for each user includes:
:
8.1.3 User Details Panels
The User Details section is applicable only for s single selected user and it includes the following tabs:
User Details General Tab
Figure 8-1: The Users Manager Table
Parameter Description
Username The name of the logged in user
Display Name The configured user’s Last Name
User State User current state:
Active: Normal state
Activation Waiting: The Account Activation Date has not been reached yet.
Suspended: A user with a suspended account cannot login until the administrator will change its state to Active.
Blocked: Number of failed login attempts has been reached and the user has been blocked.
Password Expired: The password expiration date has been reached. For more details refer to “Security Info Tab” on page 264.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 254
Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager
User Details Security Tab
User Details Locations Tab
8.1.3.1 User Details General Tab
The General tab displays the details configured in the User Editor General tab (see “General Tab” on
page 262), plus User Profile Membership as configured in the User Editor User Profile tab (see “User
Profile Tab” on page 266).
8.1.3.2 User Details Security Tab
The Security tab displays the details configured in the User Editor Security Info tab (see “Security Info
Tab” on page 264)
Figure 8-2: User Details General Tab
Figure 8-3: User Details Security Tab
AlvariSTAR User Manual 255
Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager
8.1.3.3 User Details Locations Tab
The Locations tab displays the list of locations assigned to the user. A user can manage (subject to
permissions assigned to the specific user) only locations assigned to the specific user (or all locations if
the Locations List is empty). For more details see “User Domain Manager” on page 293.
8.1.4 Users Actions Panel
The Users Actions panel includes the following options:
Figure 8-4: User Details Locations Tab
Option Action
New Adds a new user to the database. Opens the User Editor, allowing to define properties of the user to be created. For more details, see “Creating a new User” on page 257.
Edit Not available if two or more users are selected. Opens the User Editor for the selected user, allowing to edit some of the user’s properties. For more details, see “Editing an existing User” on page 262.
Delete Not available for default users. Deletes the selected user(s) from the database. The application prompts you for confirmation.
Reset Password Not available if two or more users are selected. Opens the Reset Password window, allowing to configure a new password for the user. For more details see “Reset Password” on page 267.
The Reset Password action may also be used to re-activate a suspended user whose old password has expired.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 256
Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager
8.1.5 Find Users Panel
For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.
The simple Search is performed on all columns.
The Pre-Defined Filtering option is not available for users.
Advanced Filter includes the following criteria:
Username
Display Name
User State
8.1.6 Creating a new User
Click on the New option in the Actions panel. The User editor for a new User opens, displaying the first
(General) step:
1 First Step (General)
To create a new User
AlvariSTAR User Manual 257
Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager
The General Step includes the following parameters:
Figure 8-5: The User Editor for a new User, First (General) Step
Parameter Description
User Name The name of the user. A string of 1 to 32 printable characters. Should contain only lower case characters and numbers. Must be a unique name.
First Name An optional information field providing the user’s first name. A string of 0 to 32 characters.
Middle Name An optional information field providing the user’s middle name. A string of 0 to 32 characters.
Last Name The user’s last name. A string of 0 to 32 characters. The last name is used as the Display String parameter in the Users table. If no last name is defined, the default after completing the new User creation will be the defined User Name.
Description An optional information field providing a description of the user. A string of 0 to 128 characters.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 258
Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager
Configure the mandatory User Name. You may configure other optional parameters. Click Next to open
the second (Security Info) step.
2 Second Step (Security Info)
Organization An optional information field providing details of the user’s organization. A string of 0 to 32 characters.
Address An optional information field providing details of the user’s address. A string of 0 to 255 characters.
E-mail An optional information field providing the user’s e-mail address. Must be in the correct format.
Telephone An optional information field providing the user’s telephone details.
Cellular An optional information field providing the user’s cellular phone details.
Pager An optional information field providing the user’s pager details.
Figure 8-6: The User Editor for a new User, Second (Security Info) Step
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 259
Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager
The Security Info Step includes the following parameters:
Configure the mandatory Password and confirm it. You may configure a future Account Activation Date
and change the default setting for the Password never expire option. Click Next to open the third (User
Profile) step.
3 Third Step (User Profile)
Parameter Description
User Name Read-only. Taken from the previous step.
Password A string of 5 to 32 printable character. Password is mandatory. The password must adhere to the password policy constraints (see “Password Policy Manager” on page 290).
Confirm Password Re-enter the password.
Password Creation Date When creating a new user this read-only field is empty.
Password Expiration Date When creating a new user this read-only field is empty.
Account Activation Date The date at which this account becomes effective (Active). This field lets you create accounts in advance. The accounts remain with Activation Waiting status until the specified activation date.
The default activation date is the current date, meaning the account will become effective immediately. Specify a different date using one of the following options:
Enter required date directly in the text field (or edit required components of current date), in the proper format (by default: MM/DD/YY).
Click the down arrow on the right side of the field and select a date from the calendar graphic display.
Password Never Expires When selected, the user’s password will not expire, regardless of the password policy.
Login Attempts When creating a new user this read-only field is empty.
Last Login Time When creating a new user this read-only field is empty.
User State Active or Activation Waiting.
When creating a new user without changing the default Account Activation Date (current date), the default state is Active, meaning that the new user can login immediately after finishing its creation.
When creating a new user and changing the Account Activation Date to a future time, the default state is Activation Waiting. It will change to Active at the specified activation date and time.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 260
Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager
The User Profile Step contains two tables:
Available User Profiles: All the currently available user profiles.
User Profile Membership: All the user profiles assigned to the user. When the User Profile step is
opened for the first time this table is empty.
Use the >, >>, <, and << buttons to move selected user profiles between the two tables:
Figure 8-7: The User Editor for a new User, Third (User Profile) Step
To Do This:
Assign or remove one profile to the user
1 Select a profile from the left pane (Available User Profiles)
2 Click the right-arrow (>) button to move the profile into the right pane (Profile Membership), or left-arrow (<) to remove.
Assign or remove multiple profiles
1 Ctrl+click to select multiple items or click on one item and Shift-click on another to select a range of consecutive items
2 Click the right-arrow (>) or left-arrow (<).
Assign or remove all profiles to the user
Click the double-right-arrow (>>) or double-left-arrow (<<) button
AlvariSTAR User Manual 261
Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager
When assignment of user profiles to the new user is completed, click Finish.
8.1.7 Editing an existing User
Select a User and click on the Edit option in the Actions panel. The User editor for an existing user
opens. The User editor for an existing user has three tabs:
General Tab
Security Info Tab
User Profile Tab
After performing any changes in one or some tabs, click on the OK button to save the changes.
8.1.7.1 General Tab
To edit an existing User
Figure 8-8: The User Editor General Tab
AlvariSTAR User Manual 262
Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager
The General tab includes the following parameters:
You may edit any of the parameters, excluding the read-only User Name.
Parameter Description
User Name Read-only. The User Name as defined when created.
First Name An optional information field providing the user’s first name. A string of 0 to 32 characters.
Middle Name An optional information field providing the user’s middle name. A string of 0 to 32 characters.
Last Name The user’s last name. A string of 0 to 32 characters. The last name is used as the Display String parameter in the Users table.The default is the defined User Name.
Description An optional information field providing a description of the user. A string of 0 to 128 characters.
Organization An optional information field providing details of the user’s organization. A string of 0 to 32 characters.
Address An optional information field providing details of the user’s address. A string of 0 to 255 characters.
E-mail An optional information field providing the user’s e-mail address. Must be in the correct format.
Telephone An optional information field providing the user’s telephone details.
Cellular An optional information field providing the user’s cellular phone details.
Pager An optional information field providing the user’s pager details.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 263
Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager
8.1.7.2 Security Info Tab
The Security Info tab includes the following parameters:
Figure 8-9: The User Editor Security Info Tab
Parameter Description
User Name Read-only.
Password Not displayed for security reasons. The password cannot be edited here. To change the password use the Reset Password action (see “Password Policy Manager” on page 290)
Confirm Password Empty (see Password above).
Password Creation Date Read-only. The date and time at which the password was defined.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 264
Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager
Password Expiration Date Read-only. The date and time at which the password will expire.
If the Password never expires check-box (see below) is selected, this field will be empty. Otherwise it will display expiration date according to current password policy constraints (see “Password Policy Manager” on page 290). The default is 3 months from creation date.
Account Activation Date Read-only. The date at which this account became or will become effective (Active).
Password Never Expires When selected, the user’s password will not expire, regardless of the password policy.
Login Attempts Read-only. The number of failed login attempts.
Last Login Time Read-only. The last date and time at which the user logged in.
User State The available options are:
Active
Activation Waiting: The Account Activation Date has not been reached yet. This status cannot be changed.
Suspended: a user with a suspended account cannot login until the administrator will change its state to Active.
Blocked: Number of failed login attempts has been reached and the user has been blocked. The Administrator can change the status to Active. Otherwise the user must reload the client before attempting login again.
Password Expired: The password expiration date has been reached.
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 265
Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager
8.1.7.3 User Profile Tab
The User Profile tab contains two tables:
Available User Profiles: All the currently available user profiles.
User Profile Membership: All the user profiles assigned to the user.
Use the >, >>, <, and << buttons to move selected user profiles between the two tables:
Figure 8-10: The User Editor User Profile Tab
To Do This:
Assign or remove one profile to the user
1 Select a profile from the left pane (Available User Profiles)
2 Click the right-arrow (>) button to move the profile into the right pane (Profile Membership), or left-arrow (<) to remove.
Assign or remove multiple profiles
1 Ctrl+click to select multiple items or click on one item and Shift-click on another to select a range of consecutive items
2 Click the right-arrow (>) or left-arrow (<).
AlvariSTAR User Manual 266
Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager
The User Profile Membership of a default user cannot be edited.
8.1.8 Reset Password
To change a n existing user’s password, select the user and click on the Reset Password action.
1 Enter the new password (5-32 characters)
2 Confirm the new password.
3 Click Finish to save the new password.
Refer to “Password Policy Manager” on page 290 for details on passwords policy including password
constraints.
Assign or remove all profiles to the user
Click the double-right-arrow (>>) or double-left-arrow (<<) button
Figure 8-11: Reset Password Window
To change the password:
To Do This:
AlvariSTAR User Manual 267
Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager
8.1.9 The User Selector
The User Selector window opens when selecting the Add option in the User Profile Editor General tab
when editing an existing User Profile, or in the first step when defining a new User Profile.
The User Selector displays the details of all currently defined users (for details see “Users Main Area” on
page 254). You may use the Find Users panel to search for specific user(s). For details see “Find Users
Panel” on page 257. Select one or several users and click on the Apply button. The selected user(s) will
now be included in the users table.
Figure 8-12: The User Selector
INFORMATION
Default users cannot be added to the users table.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 268
Chapter 8 - AdministrationUser Profiles ManagerChapter 8 - Administration User Profiles Manager
8.2 User Profiles Manager
This section includes:
Introduction to the User Profiles Manager
User Profiles Main Area
User Profile Details Panels
User Profiles Actions Panel
Find User Profiles Panel
Creating a new User Profile
Editing an existing User Profile
8.2.1 Introduction to the User Profiles Manager
The User Profiles Manager displays information on the currently configured user profiles and associated
properties and enables creating new user profiles, editing the properties of existing user profiles,
deleting user profiles and assigning user profiles to users.
By default, the system is provided with several user profiles:
Administrators (admin)
Observers
Managers
Map Users
The default user profiles cannot be deleted.
Select Administration > User Profiles from the Main Menu. The User Profiles tab is added to the tabs
ribbon and the User Profiles Manager is displayed.
To open the User Profiles Manager
AlvariSTAR User Manual 269
Chapter 8 - AdministrationUser Profiles ManagerChapter 8 - Administration User Profiles Manager
8.2.2 User Profiles Main Area
The User Profiles grid view comprises a table that includes details on all the currently configured user
profiles.
Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.
By default, the read-only information displayed for each user profile includes:
:
8.2.3 User Profile Details Panels
The User Profile Details section is applicable only for s single selected user profile and it includes the
following tabs:
User Profile Details General Tab
User Profile Details Security Assignment Tab
Figure 8-13: The User Profiles Table
Parameter Description
User Profile Name The name of user profile
User Count The number of users to which the user profile is assigned
AlvariSTAR User Manual 270
Chapter 8 - AdministrationUser Profiles ManagerChapter 8 - Administration User Profiles Manager
8.2.3.1 User Profile Details General Tab
The General tab displays the details configured in the User Profile Editor General tab (see “General Tab”
on page 276).
8.2.3.2 User Profile Details Security Assignment Tab
The Security Assignment tab displays the permissions of the User Profile (see “Security Assignment Tab”
on page 277).
8.2.4 User Profiles Actions Panel
The User Profiles Actions panel includes the following options:
Figure 8-14: The User Profiles Details General Tab
Figure 8-15: The User Profiles Details Security Assignment Tab
AlvariSTAR User Manual 271
Chapter 8 - AdministrationUser Profiles ManagerChapter 8 - Administration User Profiles Manager
8.2.5 Find User Profiles Panel
For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.
The simple Search and Pre-Defined Filtering options are not available for user profiles.
Advanced Filter includes the User Profile Name criterion:
8.2.6 Creating a new User Profile
Click on the New option in the Actions panel. The User Profile editor for a new User Profile opens,
displaying the first (General) step:
1 First Step (General)
Option Action
New Adds a new user profile to the database. Opens the User Profile Editor, allowing to define properties of the user profile to be created. For more details, see “Creating a new User Profile” on page 272.
Edit Not available if two or more user profiles are selected. Opens the User Profile Editor for the selected user profile, allowing to edit some of the user profile’s properties. For more details, see “Editing an existing User Profile” on page 275.
Delete Not available for default user profiles. Deletes the selected user profile(s) from the database. The application prompts you for confirmation.
To create a new User Profile
AlvariSTAR User Manual 272
Chapter 8 - AdministrationUser Profiles ManagerChapter 8 - Administration User Profiles Manager
The General Step includes the following parameters:
Configure the mandatory User Profile Name. You may also configure optional Description parameter.
The users table contains the details of all users to which the user profile should be assigned.
To add user(s), click on Add. The User Selector window opens. For details see “The User Selector” on
page 268.
Figure 8-16: The User Profile Editor for a new User Profile, First (General) Step
Parameter Description
User Profile Name The name of the user profile. A string of 1 to 32 printable characters. Should contain only characters and numbers. Must be a unique name.
Description An optional information field providing a description of the user profile. A string of 0 to 128 characters.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 273
Chapter 8 - AdministrationUser Profiles ManagerChapter 8 - Administration User Profiles Manager
You may use the Remove button to remove selected user(s) from the table. You may use the Remove All
button to clear the table.
Click Next to open the second (Security Assignment) step.
2 Second Step (Security Assignment)
The Security Assignment Step includes the read-only User Profile name as configured in the previous
step, and the Functional Permissions assignment table.
The Functional Permissions table allows selecting the functions and associated operations to be available
to users to which the user profile is assigned. By default, all available functions are de-selected.
Select a Functional Permission to see the relevant Operations (such as Delete, Edit, New, etc) that may be
available to users that can use the selected function. The list of available operations depend on the
INFORMATION
Default users cannot be added to the table.
Figure 8-17: The User Profile Editor for a new User Profile, Second (Security Assignment) Step
AlvariSTAR User Manual 274
Chapter 8 - AdministrationUser Profiles ManagerChapter 8 - Administration User Profiles Manager
selected function. By default, all operations associated with a selected function are enabled. Use the
selector check-boxes to modify the list of operations to be supported for each selected function.
Grant permissions to the user profile by selecting the predefined function check-boxes and possible
operations for. To select/de-select all, use the check-boxes next to the Functional Permissions and/or
Operations titles.
When assignment of Functional Permissions to the new user profiles is completed, click Finish.
8.2.7 Editing an existing User Profile
Select a User Profile and click on the Edit option in the Actions panel. The User Profile editor for an
existing user profile opens. The User Profile editor for an existing user profile has two tabs:
General Tab
Security Assignment Tab
After performing any changes in one or two tabs, click on the OK button to save the changes.
To edit an existing User Profile
AlvariSTAR User Manual 275
Chapter 8 - AdministrationUser Profiles ManagerChapter 8 - Administration User Profiles Manager
8.2.7.1 General Tab
The General tab includes the following parameters:
The users table contains the details of all users to which the user profile should be assigned.
To add user(s), click on Add. For details see “The User Selector” on page 268.
Figure 8-18: The User Profile Editor General Tab
Parameter Description
User Profile Name Read-only. The User Profile Name as defined when created.
Description An optional information field providing a description of the user profile. A string of 0 to 128 characters.
INFORMATION
Default users cannot be added to the table.
Default Users cannot be removed from default user profiles.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 276
Chapter 8 - AdministrationUser Profiles ManagerChapter 8 - Administration User Profiles Manager
8.2.7.2 Security Assignment Tab
The Security Assignment tab includes the read-only User Profile name and the Functional Permissions
assignment table.
The Functional Permissions table allows selecting the functions and associated operations to be available
to users to which the user profile is assigned.
Select a Functional Permission to see the relevant Operations (such as Delete, Edit, New, etc) that may be
available to users that can use the selected function. The list of available operations depend on the
selected function. By default, all operations associated with a selected function are enabled. Use the
selector check-boxes to modify the list of operations to be supported for each selected function.
Figure 8-19: The User Editor Security Assignment Tab
INFORMATION
The Security Assignment of default user profiles cannot be edited.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 277
Chapter 8 - AdministrationUser Profiles ManagerChapter 8 - Administration User Profiles Manager
Grant permissions to the user profile by selecting the predefined function check-boxes and possible
operations for. To select/de-select all, use the check-boxes next to the Functional Permissions and/or
Operations titles.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 278
Chapter 8 - AdministrationUser Sessions ManagerChapter 8 - Administration User Sessions Manager
8.3 User Sessions Manager
This section includes:
Introduction to the User Sessions Manager
User Sessions Main Area
User Sessions Actions Panel
Find User Session Panel
8.3.1 Introduction to the User Sessions Manager
The User Session Manager displays information on the currently logged in users and enables sending
messages to a logged in user. Users with Administrator privileges can terminate any session (including
their own session).
Select Administration > User Sessions from the Main Menu. The User Sessions tab is added to the tabs
ribbon and the User Sessions Manager is displayed.
The User Session Manager is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility.
To open the User Sessions Manager
AlvariSTAR User Manual 279
Chapter 8 - AdministrationUser Sessions ManagerChapter 8 - Administration User Sessions Manager
8.3.2 User Sessions Main Area
The User Sessions grid view comprises a table that includes details on all the currently logged in users.
Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.
By default, the read-only information displayed for each user session includes:
:
Figure 8-20: The User Sessions Table
Parameter Description
Username The name of the logged in user
IP Address The IP address of the user client
Login Time Date and time of login
AlvariSTAR User Manual 280
Chapter 8 - AdministrationUser Sessions ManagerChapter 8 - Administration User Sessions Manager
8.3.3 User Sessions Actions Panel
The User Sessions Actions panel includes the following options:
8.3.4 Find User Session Panel
For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.
The simple Search and Pre-Defined Filtering options are not available for user sessions.
Advanced Filters include the following criteria:
Username
IP Address
Login Time
Option Action
Kill Terminates the client sessions of the selected user(s). Only an Administrator can perform this operation.
Send Message Applicable only for a single selected session. Opens the Sending Message window, enabling you to send a text message to the selected user. An Information box with the text message will be displayed on the destination client.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 281
Chapter 8 - AdministrationThe Audit Logs ManagerChapter 8 - Administration The Audit Logs Manager
8.4 The Audit Logs Manager
This section includes:
Introduction to the Audit Logs Manager
Audit Logs Main Area
Audit Logs Details Panels
Audit Logs Actions Panel
Find Audit Log Panel
8.4.1 Introduction to the Audit Logs Manager
The management system provides a logging service that records messages to the database upon the
occurrence of pre-specified events. These messages can include event date and time, event type, error
messages and other important information according to the recorded event. The Audit Logs Manager
enables to view details of recorded events and export the logged data to an external Comma Separated
Value (CSV) file.
Select Administration > Audit Logs from the Main Menu. The Audit Logs tab is added to the tabs ribbon
and the Audit Logs Manager is displayed.
To open the Audit Logs Manager
AlvariSTAR User Manual 282
Chapter 8 - AdministrationThe Audit Logs ManagerChapter 8 - Administration The Audit Logs Manager
8.4.2 Audit Logs Main Area
The Audit Logs grid view comprises a table that includes details on all logged records.
Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.
By default, the read-only information displayed for each audit log includes:
:
8.4.3 Audit Logs Details Panels
The Audit Logs Details section provides additional details (if relevant) for the recorded event.
Figure 8-21: The Audit Logs Table
Parameter Description
Event Time The date and time of the event.
Category The event category, which is the management function associated with the event (or System for general events associated with the management system such as user login/logout, Change Password or System Startup).
User ID The name of the relevant user (or SYSTEM for events reported by the management system such as System Startup, Task Finished) or Task Started for tasks initiated by the management system).
Action The reported action
Target Entity The element which is the target of the relevant action (e.g a task name).
Entity Type The type of the Target Entity (e.g. a task’s type).
AlvariSTAR User Manual 283
Chapter 8 - AdministrationThe Audit Logs ManagerChapter 8 - Administration The Audit Logs Manager
8.4.4 Audit Logs Actions Panel
The Audit Logs Actions panel includes the following option:
8.4.5 Find Audit Log Panel
For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.
The simple Search option is not available for audit logs.
Pre-defined Filter includes filtering by Category. Available options include only categories that are
actually available in the database. Each Category will be accompanied by the current total number of
relevant instances in the database.
Advanced Filters include the following criteria:
User ID
Action
Target Entity
Entity Type
Event Time
Option Action
Export Exports the details of the selected log event(s) to an external Comma Separated Value (CSV) file. All details of selected event(s) are exported, including columns that are currently hidden. Opens the Exports Audit Logs dialog box in which you can browse to the desired location, enter a file name, and click Save. The information for the selected event(s) is exported.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 284
Chapter 8 - AdministrationLicenses ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Licenses Manager
8.5 Licenses Manager
This section includes:
Introduction to the Licenses Manager
Licenses Main Area
License Details Panels
Licenses Actions Panel
Find License Panel
NMS_Rescue License
8.5.1 Introduction to the Licenses Manager
A license defines the supported features and the number of different types of equipment that can be
managed by the management system. The Licenses Manager provides information about features and
equipment supported by each of the currently installed licenses, server information included in each
license and license expiration date. It also enables adding licenses and activating a new license.
Select Administration > Licenses from the Main Menu. The Licenses tab is added to the tabs ribbon and
the Licenses Manager is displayed.
The License Manager is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility.
To open the Licenses Manager
AlvariSTAR User Manual 285
Chapter 8 - AdministrationLicenses ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Licenses Manager
8.5.2 Licenses Main Area
The Licenses grid view comprises a table that includes details on all currently installed licenses.
Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.
By default, the read-only information displayed for each Licenses includes:
:
8.5.3 License Details Panels
The Licenses Details panel is applicable only for a single selected license. It includes the following tabs:
License Basic
License Features
Equipment
Figure 8-22: The Licenses Table
Parameter Description
License Name The name of the license.
Install Date The date and time at which the license was installed.
User ID The name of the relevant user (or SYSTEM for events reported by the management system such as System Startup, Task Finished) or Task Started for tasks initiated by the management system).
Active The activity status of the license (active/inactive). Only one license can be active.
Expires On The expiration date of the license.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 286
Chapter 8 - AdministrationLicenses ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Licenses Manager
8.5.3.1 License Basic
The License Basic tab provides the following details
License Name
Install date & Time
Activation Status
Expires on Date & time
Licensed IP Address
Licensed MAC Address
8.5.3.2 License Features
Some features of the management system are licensed features. The License Features tab provides a list
of the features supported by the license.
Figure 8-23: License Details, License Basic Tab
Figure 8-24: License Details, License Features Tab
AlvariSTAR User Manual 287
Chapter 8 - AdministrationLicenses ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Licenses Manager
8.5.3.3 Equipment
The Equipment tab provide details on the number of devices of each type supported by the license. For
each equipment type the number of currently used licenses (managed devices of the relevant type) is
shown.
When the number of discovered devices (managed devices) reaches the number of licensed devices,
additional discovered devices are marked as unlicensed (see Management Status in “Equipment List Grid
View” on page 29).
When considering future expansion plans, the number of licensed devices compared with the number of
managed devices of each type, will indicate whether there is a need for an updated license.
The Equipment tab provides also licensing details on the number of clients that can access the system
simultaneously and the number of currently active clients.
8.5.4 Licenses Actions Panel
The Licenses Actions panel includes the following options:
Figure 8-25: License Details, Equipment Tab
Option Action
Add Click to install a new license. The new license must be available in the client’s file system. Opens the Open window in which you can browse to the desired location, select the license file name, and click Open to add the new license.
Alternatively, you can save the license file in the /<Management_System>/file system/license folder. The next time the server will be restarted, the new license will also be added.
Activate Activate the selected inactive license. The previously active licensed will be de-activated.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 288
Chapter 8 - AdministrationLicenses ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Licenses Manager
8.5.5 Find License Panel
For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.
The simple Search and Pre-Defined Filter options are not available for licenses.
Advanced Filters include the following criteria:
License
Active
Install Date
8.5.6 NMS_Rescue License
The system is provided with a default license called NMS_Rescue. This license has no expiration date and
it supports a single client and no other equipment/features. The NMS_Rescue license is activated
automatically if there is no other license currently active, allowing the user to login and add a new valid
license. This prevents the user from being locked out of the application if the current license expires.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 289
Chapter 8 - AdministrationPassword Policy ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Password Policy Manager
8.6 Password Policy Manager
The Password Policy Manager enables setting general policies for user passwords, such as required
length, required characters, expiration policy.
Select Administration > Password Policy from the Main Menu. The Password Policy tab is added to the
tabs ribbon and the Password Policy Manager is displayed:
The Password Policy Manager includes the following parameters:
To open the Password Policy Manager
Figure 8-26: The Password Policy Manager
Parameter Description
Minimum Password Length Sets the minimum length of accepted passwords. Any password with less than the set minimum will be rejected.
Value range: 1 - 32.
Maximum Password Length The maximum length allowed for a password. The maximum length is pre-set to 32 characters and cannot be changed.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 290
Chapter 8 - AdministrationPassword Policy ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Password Policy Manager
Character Setting Rules Select/de-select the following check-boxes:
Lower Case: When selected, a new password will be required to include at least one lower case character.
Upper Case: When selected, a new password will be required to include at least one upper case character.
Numbers: When selected, a new password will be required to include at least one digit.
Special Characters: When selected, a new password will be required to include at least one special character, e.g. <, >, /, *, &, ^, $, #,!.
Login Attempts The number of allowed erroneous login attempts before the application is closed and the user is blocked.
This parameter can be configured for a selected user from the User Manager. In case of contradiction, the parameter set in the User Manager overrides the general policy for the specific user.
Value range: 3 - 20
Password Expiration Age The time in months before the user is required to change the password.
This parameter can be configured for a selected user from the User Manager. In case of contradiction, the parameter set in the User Manager overrides the general policy for the specific user.
From the User Manager you can set the password expiration policy for a selected user to never expire.
Value range: 1 - 12
Password Expiration Warning The number of days before a user password expires during which a message requiring to change the password is displayed. The message is displayed at every login until the password expiration age is reached.
Value range: 1 - 14
Password History The number of old passwords for the system to keep a record. The user will not be able to repeat a password included in the password history records.
Value range: 0 - 10
Inactivity Session Timeout
Not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility
The number of minutes with no user activity, after which the user is logged out. The user will be required to log in again to continue working.
Value range: 0 - 100
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 291
Chapter 8 - AdministrationPassword Policy ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Password Policy Manager
INFORMATION
All password policy parameters except Inactivity Session Timeout do not apply to external users (see “External Entities Mapping Manager” on page 295)
AlvariSTAR User Manual 292
Chapter 8 - AdministrationUser Domain ManagerChapter 8 - Administration User Domain Manager
8.7 User Domain Manager
The User Domain Manager is used to allocate location visibility domains to each user that is not an
administrator (administrators are always able to see all network elements in every location). A domain is
a group of Network Elements that are located in one or multiple areas. Therefore, domains are defined
by selecting specific locations that have been previously defined in the Locations Manager (see “The
Locations Manager” on page 95).
By default, users are not assigned to any domain, thus being able to see all network elements. A user
with an assigned domain can only view and manage the network elements and related objects inside
that domain or the ones that have no assigned location.
By default, users are not assigned to any domain, thus being able to see all network elements. A user
who is assigned to a domain, can only view and manage the network elements and related objects
inside that domain or the ones that have no domain associated. The following features are impacted:
Equipment Manager: Only equipment in the current users’s domain and equipment with no assigned
location are visible
File Manager: Only files pertaining to equipment in the current user’s domain and imported files are
visible.
Active Events/Event History: Only events pertaining to equipment in the current user’s domain are
visible
Tasks Manager: All tasks are displayed, but edit and run operations only work for equipment in the
current user’s domain.
Location Manager: All locations are displayed, but only locations associated to the current user’s
domain can be edited.
Selectors: Relevant selectors (Equipment, File, Location) implement domain based filtering
Select Administration > User Domain Manager from the Main Menu. The User Domain Manager tab is
added to the tabs ribbon and the User Domain Manager is displayed:
To open the User Domain Manager
AlvariSTAR User Manual 293
Chapter 8 - AdministrationUser Domain ManagerChapter 8 - Administration User Domain Manager
1 In the User field, use the drop-down users list to select the user whose domain should be edited.
2 In the Assigned Locations field, select/de-select locations so that all locations you want to assigned to
the selected user, and only these locations, are selected.
3 Click on the Save button to apply the new domain assignment (to cancel all changes, click on the
Revert button before clicking Save).
Figure 8-27: The User Domain Manager
To edit the domain assigned to a specific user:
INFORMATION
The list of users include local users (default users and additional users defined in the User Manager) and, if applicable, external users (see “External Entities Mapping Manager” on page 295).
AlvariSTAR User Manual 294
Chapter 8 - AdministrationExternal Entities Mapping ManagerChapter 8 - Administration External Entities Mapping Manager
8.8 External Entities Mapping Manager
If you are using an LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) server for user account management,
you can map existing LDAP entities to specific user profiles defined in the management system.
Select Administration > External Entities Mapping from the Main Menu. The External Entities Mapping
tab is added to the tabs ribbon and the External Entities Mapping Manager is displayed:
INFORMATION The external LDAP connection is disabled by default. If you want to enable it, follow these steps:
1 Go to <NMS_Installation_Path>\jboss\server\nms\deploy\bwanms.sar\conf
2 Edit the appserver.properties file
3 Look for the com.bwanms.backend.security.externalLDAPEnabled entry
4 Change its value from false to true
5 Restart the NMS server
In addition, refer to Appendix B for details on setting up a connection to a typical LDAP server.
To open the External Entities Mapping Manager
AlvariSTAR User Manual 295
Chapter 8 - AdministrationExternal Entities Mapping ManagerChapter 8 - Administration External Entities Mapping Manager
The External Entities Mapping Manager includes the following parameters:
Figure 8-28: The External Entities Mapping Manager
Parameter Description
Global Default User Profile Use the drop-down list of user profiles to assign a default user profile to entities defined in the LDAP server that are not explicitly mapped to any user profile.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 296
Chapter 8 - AdministrationExternal Entities Mapping ManagerChapter 8 - Administration External Entities Mapping Manager
When you are done defining a mapping rule, click Add to confirm it. The rule will be visible in the
mapping table.
To remove an active rule, select it from the mapping table and click Remove.
After completing all changes in mapping rules, Click OK to apply the changes.
External Entity Type Select an entity from the LDAP server that you wish to map to one or multiple user profiles. You can either choose:
A group of users, or
A specific user (in which case the group(s) it belongs to will be displayed below, in the Member of text box).
User Profiles Select one or more user profiles you wish to map to the external entity.
Use the > button to map individual user profiles that are available
Use the >> button to map all the user profiles that are available
Use the < button to unmap individual user profiles that have been previously mapped
Use the << button to unmap all the user profiles that have been previously mapped
Parameter Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 297
Chapter 9 - StarSuite
In This Chapter:
The StarSuite menu includes the following managers:
“Reports Manager” on page 299
“Charts Manager” on page 308
In addition, the menu includes cut-through links to StarQuality and StarACS management applications. The
links are available provided that the relevant management application is up and running and that the
connection is configured properly (see “Application Configuration” on page 232). Click on a management
application link to open it in a separate window.
Chapter 9 - StarSuiteReports ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Reports Manager
9.1 Reports Manager
This section includes:
Introduction to the Reports Manager
Reports
9.1.1 Introduction to the Reports Manager
The Report Manager enables generating different inventory or configuration reports for relevant devices
managed by the system.
Select StarSuite > Reports from the Main Menu. The Reports tab is added to the tabs ribbon and the
Reports Manager is displayed:
Click on a selected Run Report button to generate the required report.
For certain reports the requested report will be generated by default for all relevant entities.
For most reports a Parameter selection window will open, enabling selection of the entities for which
the requested report will be generated. The default selection for all reports is “All”. To generate a report
for selected entities select the entities you want to be included in the report. You may use the traditional
Shift-Click and Ctrl-Click selection/de-selection methods. Click OK to generate the report for the
selected entities. The report will be displayed in a new Windows Internet Explorer window/tab using
BIRT (Business Intelligence and Reporting Tools) Report Viewer.
To open the Reports Manager
Figure 9-1: The Reports Manager
AlvariSTAR User Manual 299
Chapter 9 - StarSuiteReports ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Reports Manager
9.1.2 Reports
The available reports depend on the installed device drivers:
General Inventory Reports
Extreme BTS Related Reports
COMPACT BTS Related Reports
4Motion BTS Related Reports
9.1.2.1 General Inventory Reports
The following General Inventory Reports are applicable for all currently supported product families:
Equipment Inventory: Provides general details (BTS Model, BTS Name, BTS Number, BTS Location,
Management IP Address) and inventory count details for hardware entities (such as GPS, Antenna and
other components if applicable) available for each of the selected devices. In addition, the report
includes a summary count of all relevant entities.
Detailed Equipment Inventory: Provides general details (BTS Model, BTS Name, BTS Number, BTS
Location, Management IP Address) and main hardware (Serial Number, Hardware Version, Hardware
Revision) and software (Operational Software Version, Boot Software Version) details for each of the
relevant entities.
9.1.2.2 Extreme BTS Related Reports
The Quick View Configuration report for Extreme provides the following configuration details for each
BS included in the list of selected BS IDs:
BTS:
» BTS Name
» DFS Type (if applicable)
» Uplink/Downlink Ratio
» Radio Operation Mode
BS:
» Serving BS ID/BS ID (BS Index)
» Diversity Mode
AlvariSTAR User Manual 300
Chapter 9 - StarSuiteReports ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Reports Manager
Sector:
» Sector ID
» Bandwidth (MHz)
» Frequency (MHz)
» Tx Power (in dBm)
» Current Dynamic Channel Selection (if applicable)
Radio:
» Radio Channel ID
» Operational Status
Antenna:
» Antenna Number
» Antenna Type
» Current Antenna Gain (dB)
GPS:
» GPS Type
» GPS No of Satellites
9.1.2.3 COMPACT BTS Related Reports
The COMPACT BTS Related Reports includes the following:
COMPACT Quick View Configuration
COMPACT Detailed View Configuration
COMPACT Neighboring Relation Configuration
9.1.2.3.1 COMPACT Quick View ConfigurationThe Quick View Configuration report for COMPACT provides the following configuration details for
each BS included in the list of selected BS IDs:
BTS Number
BS ID
AlvariSTAR User Manual 301
Chapter 9 - StarSuiteReports ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Reports Manager
General:
» Preamble Group
» Segment Number
» DL Diversity Mode
» Maximum Cell Radius (Km)
» Scheduler Mode
Permutation:
» Downlink Data Zone Permutation Base
» Uplink Feedback Zone Permutation Base
» Uplink Data Zone Permutation Base
Map:
» Minimum Size (symbols)
» Basic Map Repetition
Power Control: Allowed Interference Level
Basic Rate:
» Basic Rate
» Basic Rate for Management
» Basic Rate for Data
» Scheduler DL Abuse Protection Level
» Scheduler UL Abuse Protection Level
9.1.2.3.2 COMPACT Detailed View ConfigurationThe Detailed View Configuration report for COMPACT provides the following configuration details for
each BS included in the list of selected BS IDs:
BTS Number
BS ID
AlvariSTAR User Manual 302
Chapter 9 - StarSuiteReports ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Reports Manager
Frame Structure:
» Bandwidth (MHz)
» Center Frequency (MHz)
» Total UL Duration (Slots)
» Maximum Cell Radius (Km)
» Minimum Size (symbols)
» Maximum Size (symbols)
» Basic Map Repetition
» Segment Number
» Cell ID
» Preamble Group
» Preamble Index
» DL Diversity Mode
» Scheduler Mode
Permutation:
» Start of Ranging Codes
» DL Data Zone Permutation Base
» UL Feedback Zone Permutation Base
» UL Data Zone Permutation Base
Basic Rate:
» Basic Rate UL
» Basic Rate for Management
» Basic Rate for Data
» Scheduler DL Abuse Protection Level
» Scheduler UL Abuse Protection Level
AlvariSTAR User Manual 303
Chapter 9 - StarSuiteReports ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Reports Manager
Power Control:
» Allowed Interference Level
» Target Ni (dBm)
» Required C/N Levels (in dB) for transmission of ACK, CQI, CDMA, QPSK 1/2, etc.
Mobility: Deployment
9.1.2.3.3 COMPACT Neighboring Relation ConfigurationThe Neighboring Relation Configuration report for COMPACT provides the following configuration
details for each COMPACT BS with configured neighbors (in mixed deployments these can also be
4Motion BSs):
Handover Request triggers table: Provides for each configured Handover Request trigger:
» Neighbor BS ID
» Trigger Type
» Trigger Value
Scan Request triggers table: Provides for each configured Scan Request trigger:
» Neighbor BS ID
» Trigger Type
» Trigger Value
9.1.2.4 4Motion BTS Related Reports
The 4Motion BTS Related Reports includes the following:
4Motion Quick View Configuration
4Motion Detailed View Configuration
4Motion Neighboring Relation Configuration
9.1.2.4.1 4Motion Quick View ConfigurationThe Quick View Configuration report for 4Motion provides the following configuration details for each
BS included in the list of selected BS IDs:
BTS Number
BS ID
AlvariSTAR User Manual 304
Chapter 9 - StarSuiteReports ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Reports Manager
General:
» Preamble Group
» Segment Number
» DL Diversity Mode
» Maximum Cell Radius (Km)
» Scheduler Mode
Permutation:
» Downlink Data Zone Permutation Base
» Uplink Feedback Zone Permutation Base
» Uplink Data Zone Permutation Base
Map:
» Minimum Size (symbols)
» Basic Map Repetition
Power Control: Allowed Interference Level
Basic Rate:
» Basic Rate
» Basic Rate for Management
» Basic Rate for Data
» Scheduler DL Abuse Protection Level
» Scheduler UL Abuse Protection Level
9.1.2.4.2 4Motion Detailed View ConfigurationThe Detailed View Configuration report for 4Motion provides the following configuration details for
each BS included in the list of selected BS IDs:
BTS Number
BS ID
AlvariSTAR User Manual 305
Chapter 9 - StarSuiteReports ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Reports Manager
Frame Structure:
» Bandwidth (MHz)
» Center Frequency (MHz)
» Total UL Duration (Slots)
» Maximum Cell Radius (Km)
» Minimum Size (symbols)
» Maximum Size (symbols)
» Basic Map Repetition
» Segment Number
» Cell ID
» Preamble Group
» Preamble Index
» DL Diversity Mode
» Scheduler Mode
Permutation:
» Start of Ranging Codes
» DL Data Zone Permutation Base
» UL Feedback Zone Permutation Base
» UL Data Zone Permutation Base
Basic Rate:
» Basic Rate UL
» Basic Rate for Management
» Basic Rate for Data
» Scheduler DL Abuse Protection Level
» Scheduler UL Abuse Protection Level
AlvariSTAR User Manual 306
Chapter 9 - StarSuiteReports ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Reports Manager
Power Control:
» Allowed Interference Level
» Target Ni (dBm)
» Required C/N Levels (in dB) for transmission of ACK, CQI, CDMA, QPSK 1/2, etc.
Mobility: Deployment
Beam Forming:
» Calibration Attenuator
» Neighbor Beam Forming
9.1.2.4.3 4Motion Neighboring Relation ConfigurationThe Neighboring Relation Configuration report for 4Motion provides the following configuration details
for each 4Motion BS with configured neighbors (in mixed deployments these can also be COMPACT
BSs):
Handover Request triggers table: Provides for each configured Handover Request trigger:
» Neighbor BS ID
» Trigger Type
» Trigger Value
Scan Request triggers table: Provides for each configured Scan Request trigger:
» Neighbor BS ID
» Trigger Type
» Trigger Value
AlvariSTAR User Manual 307
Chapter 9 - StarSuiteCharts ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Charts Manager
9.2 Charts Manager
This section includes:
Introduction to the Charts Manager
Managing a Graph/Chart
Available Graphs/Charts
9.2.1 Introduction to the Charts Manager
The Charts manager enables viewing factory defined charts and graphs. The availability of certain
charts/graphs depend on the available management applications (StarQuality and StarACS) and types of
managed equipment.
Select StarSuite > Charts from the Main Menu. The Charts tab is added to the tabs ribbon and the
Charts Manager is displayed:
9.2.2 Managing a Graph/Chart
Each graph/chart includes the following controls:
To open the Charts Manager
Figure 9-2: The Charts Manager
AlvariSTAR User Manual 308
Chapter 9 - StarSuiteCharts ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Charts Manager
9.2.3 Available Graphs/Charts
The following graphs and charts are available:
Graphs/Charts that are always available - all product families
Graphs available if StarQuality is available
Charts available if StarACS is available
Charts available for Extreme
9.2.3.1 Graphs/Charts that are always available - all product families
The graphs and charts detailed below are based on information retrieved from the management
system’s database and are always available. Configuration options for each graph/chart are also
provided. Default values are emphasized (bold):
Table 9-1: Graph/Chart Controls
Control Description
Configure Click to switch to configuration mode, allowing you to configure the following:
Polling: The refresh rate (where applicable).
Duration: Applicable only for graphs. Each graph presents the relevant data using a time axis, ascending to the right. The right-most point is the last refreshed one. The left-most point is defined by the duration parameter.
Hide Legends check box. The default is selected (hide legends). De-select to display legends. When legends are displayed a check-box next to each legend enables selecting/de-selecting the relevant instance (by default all legends are selected).
Click Back to apply changes and exit configuration mode.
Expand/Restore Click Expand to use full screen for displaying the graph/chart. Click Restore to exit full screen mode.
Print Click to print the graph/chart.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 309
Chapter 9 - StarSuiteCharts ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Charts Manager
Table 9-2: Supported Graphs/Charts that are always available
Name Description Refresh Rate Duration
Alarms Graph Linear graphs of no. of open BTS summarized alarms, classified per severity vs. time.
10 seconds
20 seconds
1 minute
2 minutes
5 minutes
10 minutes
1 minute
2 minutes
5 minutes
10 minutes
20 minutes
1 hour
2 hours
5 hours
12 hours
24 hours
Alarms Distribution Chart
A bar-chart of no. of currently-open BTS summarized alarms, classified per severity.
10 seconds
20 seconds
1 minute
2 minutes
5 minutes
10 minutes
N/A
BTSs Management Chart
A pie-chart of BTS management status distribution.
1 minute
2 minutes
5 minutes
10 minutes
20 minutes
1 hour
N/A
AlvariSTAR User Manual 310
Chapter 9 - StarSuiteCharts ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Charts Manager
BTSs Management Graph
Linear graphs of BTS management status vs. time.
1 minute
2 minutes
5 minutes
10 minutes
20 minutes
1 hour
1 minute
2 minutes
5 minutes
10 minutes
20 minutes
1 hour
2 hours
5 hours
12 hours
24 hours
BTSs Operability Chart
A pie-chart of BTS operational state distribution.
1 minute
2 minutes
5 minutes
10 minutes
20 minutes
1 hour
N/A
BTSs Operability Graph
Linear graphs of BTS operational state vs. time.
1 minute
2 minutes
5 minutes
10 minutes
20 minutes
1 hour
1 minute
2 minutes
5 minutes
10 minutes
20 minutes
1 hour
2 hours
5 hours
12 hours
24 hours
Table 9-2: Supported Graphs/Charts that are always available
Name Description Refresh Rate Duration
AlvariSTAR User Manual 311
Chapter 9 - StarSuiteCharts ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Charts Manager
9.2.3.2 Graphs available if StarQuality is available
The graphs detailed below are based on information recorded by StarQuality for the last 15-minutes
period. Configuration options for each graph are also provided. Default values are emphasized (bold):
BTSs SW Versions Chart
A pie chart of BTS SW versions distribution. 1 minute
2 minutes
5 minutes
10 minutes
20 minutes
1 hour
2 hours
5 hours
12 hours
24 hours
N/A
Table 9-3: Supported Graphs if StarQuality is available
Name Description Refresh Rate Duration
MSs Registration Graph
A linear graph of total number of number of registered MSs of the BTSs, vs. time.
Applicable only for 4Motion/BreezeCOMPACT MSs
15 minutes
1 hour
2 hours
5 hours
12 hours
24 hours
1 hour
2 hours
5 hours
12 hours
24 hours
Total UL/ DL Throughput Graph
A linear graph of BTSs total throughput (sum of all relevant AUs throughput in the network), separately for uplink and downlink, vs. time.
15 minutes (fixed)
2 hours
5 hours
12 hours
24 hours
Table 9-2: Supported Graphs/Charts that are always available
Name Description Refresh Rate Duration
AlvariSTAR User Manual 312
Chapter 9 - StarSuiteCharts ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Charts Manager
9.2.3.3 Charts available if StarACS is available
The charts detailed below are based on information recorded by StarACS for the last 24 hours period.
These charts are applicable only for COMPACT/4Motion BTSs. Configuration options for each chart are
also provided. Default values are emphasized (bold):
9.2.3.4 Charts available for Extreme
The charts detailed below are based on information retrieved from AlvariSTAR database and are
applicable only for Extreme BTSs. In these charts, the Refresh Rate is fixed at 5 minutes and the Duration
parameter is not applicable.
For each KPI, both a pie chart and a 3D bar chart are available:
Table 9-4: Supported Charts if StarACS is available
Name Description Refresh Rate Duration
MSs Types Chart A pie-chart of MSs type distribution.
Data Source: StarACS
1 minute
2 minutes
5 minutes
10 minutes
20 minutes
1 hour
N/A
MSs Profiles Chart A pie-chart of MSs service profiles distribution.
Data Source: StarACS
1 minute
2 minutes
5 minutes
10 minutes
20 minutes
1 hour
N/A
AlvariSTAR User Manual 313
Chapter 9 - StarSuiteCharts ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Charts Manager
Table 9-5: Supported Extreme Performance Charts
Name Description
Number of Satellites in Use
A pie-chart/3D bar-chart displaying the percentage/number of devices with the "Current number of satellites in use" KPI having the following values:
Between 0 and 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11 or more
The system shall also represent on the chart the percentage/number of devices for which the system was unable to collect this KPI during the last 5 minutes interval.
Average sector CINR of UL for All MSs
A pie-chart/3D bar-chart displaying the percentage/number of sectors with the "Average sector CINR of UL for all served MSs" KPI having the following values:
Between 0 and 4
Between 5 and 10
Between 11 and 14
Between 15 and 20
21 or more
The system shall also represent on the chart the percentage/number of sectors for which the system was unable to collect this KPI during the last 5 minutes interval.
Average sector CINR of UL for All MSs is calculated as sum over all MSs of last Uplink CINR measurement divided by the number of served MSs.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 314
Chapter 9 - StarSuiteCharts ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Charts Manager
Average Sector CINR of DL for All MSs
A pie-chart/3D bar-chart displaying the percentage/number of sectors with the "Average sector CINR of UL for all served MSs" KPI having the following values:
Between 0 and 4
Between 5 and 10
Between 11 and 14
Between 15 and 20
21 or more
The system shall also represent on the chart the percentage/number of sectors for which the system was unable to collect this KPI during the last 5 minutes interval.
Average sector CINR of UL for All MSs is calculated as sum over all MSs of last Downlink CINR measurement divided by the number of served MSs.
UL Modulation in Use
A pie-chart/3D bar-chart displaying the percentage/number of sectors with the “UL Modulation in Use per sector” KPI for each UL Rate.
The UL Modulation in Use is calculated using numbers to represent the different modulation rates (Modulation Number) and calculating the rounded sum over all MSs of last Uplink Modulation Number divided by the number of served MSs. The resulting average modulation number is translated to the relevant modulation rate. See details of uplink modulation numbers in Table 9-6 below.
Note: There is no rate with modulation number 7. If the calculated KPI is between 6.5 and 7 inclusive, it is considered as 6 (QAM16-CTC-3/4). If the calculated KPI is between 7 and 7.5, it is considered as 8 (QAM64-CTC-2/3).
The system shall also represent on the chart the percentage/number of sectors for which the system was unable to collect this KPI during the last 5 minutes interval.
Table 9-5: Supported Extreme Performance Charts
Name Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 315
Chapter 9 - StarSuiteCharts ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Charts Manager
DL Modulation in Use
A pie-chart/3D bar-chart displaying the percentage/number of sectors with the “DL Modulation in Use per sector” KPI for each DL Rate.
The DL Modulation in Use is calculated using numbers to represent the different modulation rates (Modulation Number) and calculating the rounded sum over all MSs of last Downlink Modulation Number divided by the number of served MSs. The resulting average modulation number is translated to the relevant modulation rate. See details of downlink modulation numbers in Table 9-7 below.
Note: There is no rate with modulation number 7. If the calculated KPI is between 6.5 and 7 inclusive, it is considered as 6 (QAM16-CTC-3/4, MIMO A). If the calculated KPI is between 7 and 7.5, it is considered as 8 (QAM64-CTC-2/3, MIMO A).
There is also no rate with modulation number 17. If the calculated KPI is between 16.5 and 17 inclusive, it is considered as 16 (QAM16-CTC-3/4, MIMO B). If the calculated KPI is between 17 and 17.5, it is considered as 18 (QAM64-CTC-2/3, MIMO B).
The system shall also represent on the chart the percentage/number of sectors for which the system was unable to collect this KPI during the last 5 minutes interval.
UL NACK Rate A pie-chart/3D bar-chart displaying the percentage/number of sectors with the "UL NACK rate" KPI having the following values:
Between 0 and 2.9999 (%)
Between 3 and 9.9999 (%)
10 or more
The system shall also represent on the chart the percentage/number of sectors for which the system was unable to collect this KPI during the last 5 minutes interval.
Uplink NACK rate is computed using the following formula:
UL NACK = 100*SUM(NACK Frames/ACK Frames)/Number of MSs.
where:
NACK Frames = number of non-acknowledged uplink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.
ACK Frames = number of acknowledged uplink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.
Note: if for a certain MS number of acknowledged frames is zero, the MS shall not be taken into consideration when performing the average.
Table 9-5: Supported Extreme Performance Charts
Name Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 316
Chapter 9 - StarSuiteCharts ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Charts Manager
DL NACK Rate A pie-chart/3D bar-chart displaying the percentage/number of sectors with the "DL NACK rate" KPI having the following values:
Between 0 and 2.9999 (%)
Between 3 and 9.9999 (%)
10 or more
The system shall also represent on the chart the percentage/number of sectors for which the system was unable to collect this KPI during the last 5 minutes interval.
Downlink NACK rate is computed using the following formula:
DL NACK = 100*SUM(NACK Frames/ACK Frames)/Number of MSs.
where:
NACK Frames = number of non-acknowledged downlink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.
ACK Frames = number of acknowledged downlink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.
Note: if for a certain MS number of acknowledged frames is zero, the MS shall not be taken into consideration when performing the average.
UL Dropped Bursts A pie-chart/3D bar-chart displaying the percentage/number of sectors with the "UL Dropped bursts" KPI having the following values:
Between 0 and 3
Between 4 and 5
6 or more
The system shall also represent on the chart the percentage/number of sectors for which the system was unable to collect this KPI during the last 5 minutes interval.
UL Dropped bursts is computed using the following formula: 100*SUM(Dropped Frames/ACK Frames)/Number of MSs.
where:
Dropped Frames = number of dropped uplink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.
ACK Frames = number of acknowledged uplink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.
Note: if for a certain MS number of acknowledged frames is zero, the MS shall not be taken into consideration when performing the average.
Table 9-5: Supported Extreme Performance Charts
Name Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 317
Chapter 9 - StarSuiteCharts ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Charts Manager
DL Dropped Bursts A pie-chart/3D bar-chart displaying the percentage/number of sectors with the "DL Dropped bursts" KPI having the following values:
Between 0 and 3
Between 4 and 5
6 or more
The system shall also represent on the chart the percentage/number of sectors for which the system was unable to collect this KPI during the last 5 minutes interval.
DL Dropped bursts is computed using the following formula: 100*SUM(Dropped Frames/ACK Frames)/Number of MSs.
where:
Dropped Frames = number of non-acknowledged downlink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.
ACK Frames = number of acknowledged downlink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.
Note: if for a certain MS number of acknowledged frames is zero, the MS shall not be taken into consideration when performing the average.
Table 9-6: Uplink Modulation Number
Rate Modulation Number
QPSK-CTC-1/2 REP4 1
QPSK-CTC-1/2 REP2 2
QPSK-CTC-1/2 3
QPSK-CTC-3/4 4
QAM16-CTC-1/2 5
QAM16-CTC-3/4 6
QAM64-CTC-2/3 8
QAM64-CTC-3/4 9
QAM64-CTC-5/6 10
Table 9-7: Downlink Modulation Number
Rate Modulation Number
QPSK-CTC-1/2 REP4, MIMO A 1
Table 9-5: Supported Extreme Performance Charts
Name Description
AlvariSTAR User Manual 318
Chapter 9 - StarSuiteCharts ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Charts Manager
QPSK-CTC-1/2 REP2, MIMO A 2
QPSK-CTC-1/2, MIMO A 3
QPSK-CTC-3/4, MIMO A 4
QAM16-CTC-1/2, MIMO A 5
QAM16-CTC-3/4, MIMO A 6
QAM64-CTC-2/3, MIMO A 8
QAM64-CTC-3/4, MIMO A 9
QAM64-CTC-5/6, MIMO A 10
QPSK-CTC-1/2 REP4, MIMO B 11
QPSK-CTC-1/2 REP2, MIMO B 12
QPSK-CTC-1/2, MIMO AB 13
QPSK-CTC-3/4, MIMO B 14
QAM16-CTC-1/2, MIMO B 15
QAM16-CTC-3/4, MIMO B 16
QAM64-CTC-2/3, MIMO B 18
QAM64-CTC-3/4, MIMO B 19
QAM64-CTC-5/6, MIMO B 20
Table 9-7: Downlink Modulation Number
Rate Modulation Number
AlvariSTAR User Manual 319
Appendix A - WatchdogAppendix A - Watchdog
Appendix A - Watchdog
AlvariSTAR User Manual 320
Appendix A - WatchdogAppendix A - Watchdog
In This Appendix:
“The Watchdog Application” on page 322
AlvariSTAR User Manual 321
Appendix A - WatchdogThe Watchdog ApplicationAppendix A - Watchdog The Watchdog Application
A.1 The Watchdog Application
Watchdog is an external application for monitoring the NMS server, LDAP and database servers
(providing they reside on the same machine as the NMS). The NMS watchdog service is started when the
NMS server is started.
In case the server or LDAP are down, Watchdog will try to restart them. The monitoring information and
the actions involved in restarting the NMS server or LDAP are written in the watchdog.log file. The log is
saved daily to <Management System Root>\<NMS installation folder>\watchdog\watchdog.log.YYYY-MM-DD
Watchdog can be configured from the watchdog.properties file located in <Management System
Root>\<NMS installation folder>\watchdog.
Watchdog logs can be automatically deleted by configuring the following two parameters (in red text) in
the log4j.xml file located in <Management System Root>\<NMS installation folder>\watchdog.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<?xml version=”1.0” encoding=”UTF-8” ?>
<!DOCTYPE log4j:configuration SYSTEM “log4j.dtd”>
<log4j:configuration xmlns:log4j=”http://jakarta.apache.org/log4j/”>
<appender name=”LOG_SHRINK” class=”com.bwanms.watchdogcommon.SizeShrinkAppender”>
<param name=”File” value=”${nms.root}/watchdog/log/dummy.log”/>
<param name=”MaxFileSize” value=”10KB”/>
<param name=”MaxBackupIndex” value=”1”/>
<param name=”RetainsDays” value=”10”/>
<!-- max log files size (ex.: 10KB, 20MB, 3GB, 100) -->
<param name=”MaxFilesSize” value=”10MB”/>
<layout class=”org.apache.log4j.PatternLayout”>
<param name=”ConversionPattern” value=”%d %-5r %-5p [%c{2}] (%t:%x) %m%n”/>
</layout>
</appender>
AlvariSTAR User Manual 322
Appendix A - WatchdogThe Watchdog ApplicationAppendix A - Watchdog The Watchdog Application
<appender name=”FILE” class=”org.apache.log4j.DailyRollingFileAppender”>
<param name=”File” value=”${nms.root}/watchdog/log/watchdog.log” />
<!-- Rollover at midnight each day -->
<param name=”DatePattern” value=”’.’yyyy-MM-dd”/>
<layout class=”org.apache.log4j.PatternLayout”>
<param name=”ConversionPattern” value=”%d{ABSOLUTE} %5p %c{1} - %m%n”/>
</layout>
</appender>
<appender name=”stdout” class=”org.apache.log4j.ConsoleAppender”>
<layout class=”org.apache.log4j.PatternLayout”>
<param name=”ConversionPattern” value=”%d{ABSOLUTE} %5p %c{1} - %m%n”/>
</layout>
<filter class=”org.apache.log4j.varia.LevelRangeFilter”>
<param name=”LevelMin” value=”INFO” />
<param name=”LevelMax” value=”INFO” />
</filter>
</appender>
<root>
<priority value=”INFO” />
<appender-ref ref=”FILE”/>
<appender-ref ref=”LOG_SHRINK”/>
<appender-ref ref=”stdout”/>
</root>
</log4j:configuration>
AlvariSTAR User Manual 323
Appendix B - Connecting to an External LDAP ServerAppendix B - Connecting to an External LDAP Server
Appendix B - Connecting to an External LDAP Server
AlvariSTAR User Manual 324
Appendix B - Connecting to an External LDAP ServerAppendix B - Connecting to an External LDAP Server
In This Appendix:
This appendix describes how to set up a connection to a typical LDAP server:
“The LDAP Server Configuration File” on page 326
“Open LDAP Configuration” on page 327
“Active Directory Configuration” on page 328
AlvariSTAR User Manual 325
Appendix B - Connecting to an External LDAP ServerThe LDAP Server Configuration FileAppendix B - Connecting to an External LDAP Server The LDAP Server Configuration File
B.1 The LDAP Server Configuration File
To set up the parameters for connecting to an external LDAP server:
1 Go to <NMS path>\jboss\server\nms\deploy\bwanms.sar\conf
2 Open the external-ldap.properties file.
3 Edit the LDIF entries in this file, so that they apply to the corresponding LDAP server.
See “Open LDAP Configuration” on page 327 and “Active Directory Configuration” on page 328 for
examples on how to configure the external-ldap.properties file.
AlvariSTAR User Manual 326
Appendix B - Connecting to an External LDAP ServerOpen LDAP ConfigurationAppendix B - Connecting to an External LDAP Server Open LDAP Configuration
B.2 Open LDAP Configuration
The example below illustrates a typical configuration for connecting to an Open LDAP server (installed by
default from the Solaris CD).
java.naming.factory.initial = com.sun.jndi.ldap.LdapCtxFactory
java.naming.provider.url = ldap://192.168.10.171:10389
java.naming.security.authentication = simple
rootDN = cn=Directory Manager
rootPW = nssecret
ldapSuffix = dc=testing,dc=ldap
principalCNPrefix = ou=
principalCN = People
principalDNPrefix = cn=
groupCNPrefix = ou=
groupCN = Groups
groupDNPrefix = cn=
userObjectClass = inetOrgPerson
groupObjectClass = groupofUniqueNames
usernameAttribute = cn
#accountNameAttribute = sAMAccountName
groupNameAttribute = cn
groupDescriptionAttribute = description
groupMembersAttribute = uniquemember
AlvariSTAR User Manual 327
Appendix B - Connecting to an External LDAP ServerActive Directory ConfigurationAppendix B - Connecting to an External LDAP Server Active Directory Configuration
B.3 Active Directory Configuration
The example below illustrates a typical configuration for connecting to an Active Directory server.
java.naming.factory.initial = com.sun.jndi.ldap.LdapCtxFactory
java.naming.provider.url = ldap://192.168.10.120:389
java.naming.security.authentication = simple
rootDN = cn=Administrator,cn=Users,dc=nms,dc=local
rootPW = alpha
ldapSuffix = dc=nms,dc=local
principalCNPrefix = cn=
principalCN = Users
principalDNPrefix = cn=
groupCNPrefix = cn=
groupCN = Users
groupDNPrefix = cn=
userObjectClass = organizationalPerson
groupObjectClass = group
usernameAttribute = cn
accountNameAttribute = sAMAccountName
groupNameAttribute = cn
groupDescriptionAttribute = description
groupMembersAttribute = member
AlvariSTAR User Manual 328